Fluke Calibration 5500A Multi-Product Calibrator Service Manual
Advertisement
Advertisement
®
PN 105798
August 1995 Rev.6, 7/06
© 1995-2006 Fluke Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
All product names are trademarks of their respective companies.
5500A
Multi-Product Calibrator
Service Manual
LIMITED WARRANTY & LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment.
Parts, product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days. This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end-user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller, and does not apply to fuses, disposable batteries or to any product which, in Fluke's opinion, has been misused, altered, neglected or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling. Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for
90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non-defective media. Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption.
Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end-user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke.
Warranty support is available if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or
Buyer has paid the applicable international price. Fluke reserves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair/replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country.
Fluke's warranty obligation is limited, at Fluke's option, to refund of the purchase price, free of charge repair, or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period.
To obtain warranty service, contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center or send the product, with a description of the difficulty, postage and insurance prepaid (FOB Destination), to the nearest Fluke authorized service center. Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit.
Following warranty repair, the product will be returned to Buyer, transportation prepaid (FOB
Destination). If Fluke determines that the failure was caused by misuse, alteration, accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling, Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work. Following repair, the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges (FOB Shipping Point).
THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA, WHETHER
ARISING FROM BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, RELIANCE OR
ANY OTHER THEORY.
Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty, or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer. If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.
Fluke Corporation
P.O. Box 9090
Everett, WA 98206-9090
Fluke Europe B.V.
P.O. Box 1186
5602 BD Eindhoven
5/94
W
CAUTION
This is an IEC safety Class 1 product. Before using, the ground wire in the line cord or rear panel binding post must be connected to an earth ground for safety.
Interference Information
This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures:
•
Reorient the receiving antenna
•
Relocate the equipment with respect to the receiver
•
Move the equipment away from the receiver
•
Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the computer and receiver are on different branch circuits
If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal
Communications Commission helpful: How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference
Problems. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
20402. Stock No. 004-000-00345-4.
Declaration of the Manufacturer or Importer
We hereby certify that the Fluke Model 5500A is in compliance with BMPT Vfg 243/1991 and is
RFI suppressed. The normal operation of some equipment (e.g. signal generators) may be subject to specific restrictions. Please observe the notices in the users manual. The marketing and sales of the equipment was reported to the Central Office for Telecommunication Permits
(BZT). The right to retest this equipment to verify compliance with the regulation was given to the BZT.
Bescheinigung des Herstellers/Importeurs
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, da
β
die Fluke Model 5500A in Übereinstimmung mit den
Bestimmungen der BMPT-AmtsblVfg 243/1991 funk-entstört sind. Der vorschriftsmäßige
Betrieb mancher Geräte (z.B. Meßsender) kann allerdings gewissen Einschränkungen unterliegen. Beachten Sie deshalb die Hinweise in der Bedienungsanleitung. Dem Bundesamt für Zulassungen in der Telecommunikation wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerätes angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur Überprüfung der Serie auf Einhaltung der Bestimmungen eingeräumt.
Fluke Corporation
SAFETY TERMS IN THIS MANUAL
This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC publication
1010-1 (1992-1), Safety Requirements for Electrical Measuring, Control and Laboratory
Equipment, and ANSI/ISA-582.01-1994, and CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1-92. This User
Manual contains information, warning, and cautions that must be followed to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition. Use of this equipment in a manner not specified herein may impair the protection provided by the equipment.
This instrument is designed for IEC 1010-1 Installation Category II use. It is not designed for connection to circuits rated over 4800 VA.
WARNING statements identify conditions or practices that could result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to equipment.
SYMBOLS MARKED ON EQUIPMENT
WARNING
Risk of electric shock. Refer to the manual (see the Index for references).
GROUND Ground terminal to chassis (earth).
Attention Refer to the manual (see the Index for references). This symbol indicates that information about usage of a feature is contained in the manual. This symbol appears on the rear panel ground post and by the fuse compartment.
AC POWER SOURCE
The instrument is intended to operate from an ac power source that will not apply more than 264V ac rms between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground. A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is required for safe operation.
USE THE PROPER FUSE
To avoid fire hazard, for fuse replacement use only the specified unit: 110 or 120 V operation, 2.5 ampere/250 volt time delay; 220 or 240 V operation, 1.25 ampere/250 volt time delay.
GROUNDING THE INSTRUMENT
The instrument utilizes controlled overvoltage techniques that require the instrument to be grounded whenever normal mode or common mode ac voltages or transient voltages may occur. The enclosure must be grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord, or through the rear panel ground binding post.
USE THE PROPER POWER CORD
Use only the power cord and connector appropriate for the voltage and plug configuration in your country.
Use only a power cord that is in good condition.
Refer power cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel.
DO NOT OPERATE IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES
To avoid explosion, do not operate the instrument in an atmosphere of explosive gas.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER DURING OPERATION
To avoid personal injury or death, do not remove the instrument cover without first removing the power source connected to the rear panel. Do not operate the instrument without the cover properly installed. Normal calibration is accomplished with the cover closed. Access procedures and the warnings for such procedures are contained both in this manual and in the Service Manual. Service procedures are for qualified service personnel only.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPERATE IF PROTECTION MAY BE IMPAIRED
If the instrument appears damaged or operates abnormally, protection may be impaired.
Do not attempt to operate the instrument under these conditions. Refer all questions of proper instrument operation to qualified service personnel.
Table of Contents
Chapter Title
1
2
Page
Introduction and Specifications......................................................... 1-1
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
General Specifications...................................................................... 1-6
DC Voltage Specifications ............................................................... 1-7
DC Current Specifications................................................................ 1-8
Resistance Specifications ................................................................. 1-9
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
1-9.
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications .......................................... 1-10
AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications........................................... 1-13
1-10.
Capacitance Specifications............................................................... 1-15
1-11.
Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple) Specifications ................ 1-16
1-12.
Temperature Calibration (RTD) Specifications................................ 1-17
1-13.
DC Power Specification Summary................................................... 1-18
1-14.
AC Power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) Specification Summary, PF=1 ............ 1-18
1-15.
Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications................................... 1-19
1-16.
Phase Specifications ......................................................................... 1-20
1-17.
Calculating Power Uncertainty......................................................... 1-21
1-18.
Additional Specifications...................................................................... 1-22
1-19.
Frequency Specifications.................................................................. 1-22
1-20.
Harmonics (2 nd
to 50 th
) Specifications.............................................. 1-22
1-21.
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications........ 1-23
1-22.
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave) Specifications .................................. 1-24
1-23.
AC Voltage, DC Offset Specifications............................................. 1-25
1-24.
AC Voltage, Square Wave Characteristics....................................... 1-25
1-25.
AC Voltage, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical)...................... 1-25
1-26.
AC Current (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications ........ 1-25
1-27.
AC Current (Non-Sinewave) Specifications .................................... 1-26
1-28.
AC Current, Square Wave Characteristics (typical)......................... 1-26
1-29.
AC Current, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical) ...................... 1-26
Theory of Operation ............................................................................ 2-1
2-1.
2-2.
Encoder Assembly (A2)........................................................................ 2-4
i
5500A
Service Manual
3
2-3.
Synthesized Impedance Assembly (A5) ............................................... 2-4
2-4.
DDS Assembly (A6)............................................................................. 2-5
2-5.
Current Assembly (A7)......................................................................... 2-6
2-6.
Voltage Assembly (A8) ........................................................................ 2-7
2-7.
Main CPU Assembly (A9).................................................................... 2-8
2-8.
2-9.
Outguard Supplies ............................................................................ 2-8
2-10.
Inguard Supplies............................................................................... 2-8
Calibration and Verification................................................................ 3-1
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification ..................... 3-3
Starting Calibration .......................................................................... 3-4
How the Calibration Procedure Works............................................. 3-4
Thermocouple Measuring................................................................. 3-6
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
AUX DC Volts ................................................................................. 3-8
3-12.
AUX AC Volts ................................................................................. 3-9
3-13.
3-14.
3-15.
Capacitance, Four-Wire Comp ......................................................... 3-14
3-16.
3-17.
NORMAL Volts and AUX Volts Phase........................................... 3-15
3-18.
Volts and AUX Current Phase ......................................................... 3-15
3-19.
Remote Commands for 5500A Calibration ...................................... 3-16
3-20.
Generating a Calibration Report ........................................................... 3-18
3-21.
Calibration Shifts Report, Printout Format....................................... 3-18
3-22.
Calibration Shifts Report, Spreadsheet Format ................................ 3-19
3-23.
Calibration Constant Report, Printout Format.................................. 3-19
3-24.
Calibration Constants Report, Spreadsheet Format.......................... 3-20
3-25.
Performance Verification Tests ............................................................ 3-20
3-26.
Zeroing the Calibrator ...................................................................... 3-20
3-27.
DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)................................ 3-21
3-28.
DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (AUX) ........................................ 3-21
3-29.
DC Current Amplitude Accuracy ..................................................... 3-22
3-30.
Resistance Accuracy......................................................................... 3-23
3-31.
Resistance DC Offset Measurement................................................. 3-24
3-32.
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)................................ 3-25
3-33.
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (AUX) ........................................ 3-27
3-34.
AC Current Amplitude Accuracy ..................................................... 3-28
3-35.
Capacitance Accuracy ...................................................................... 3-29
3-36.
Thermocouple Measurement Accuracy............................................ 3-31
3-37.
Thermocouple Sourcing Accuracy ................................................... 3-31
3-38.
Thermocouple Measuring Accuracy ................................................ 3-31
3-39.
DC Power Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL) .................................. 3-32
3-40.
DC Power Amplitude Accuracy (AUX)........................................... 3-32
3-41.
AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Voltage).............................. 3-33
3-42.
AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Current) .............................. 3-33
3-43.
AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Power) ................................ 3-34
3-44.
Phase and Frequency Accuracy........................................................ 3-34
ii
5
6
Contents
(continued)
3-45.
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (NORMAL) .......... 3-36
3-46.
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (AUX)................... 3-37
3-47.
AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)............... 3-38
3-48.
AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (AUX) ....................... 3-39
3-49.
DC Voltage Offset Accuracy............................................................ 3-39
3-50.
AC Voltage Accuracy with a DC Offset .......................................... 3-40
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
Removing Analog Modules.............................................................. 4-3
Removing the Main CPU (A9)......................................................... 4-3
Removing Rear Panel Assemblies.................................................... 4-4
Removing the Filter PCA (A12)....................................................... 4-4
Removing the Encoder (A2) and Display PCAs .............................. 4-4
Removing the Keyboard and Accessing the Output Block .............. 4-4
4-9.
4-10.
Running Diagnostics ........................................................................ 4-7
4-11.
4-12.
Sequence of Diagnostics Tests..................................................... 4-7
Diagnostics Error Messages......................................................... 4-7
4-13.
Testing the Front Panel..................................................................... 4-13
4-14.
Internal Fuse Replacement.................................................................... 4-14
4-15.
Complete List of Error Messages ......................................................... 4-14
List of Replaceable Parts.................................................................... 5-1
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
How to Contact Fluke ........................................................................... 5-3
5-4.
Oscilloscope Calibration Options...................................................... 6-1
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
SC600 Specifications............................................................................ 6-6
6-4.
Volt Specifications ........................................................................... 6-6
Edge Specifications .......................................................................... 6-7
Leveled Sine Wave Specifications ................................................... 6-8
Time Marker Specifications ............................................................. 6-9
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
Wave Generator Specifications ........................................................ 6-9
Pulse Generator Specifications......................................................... 6-10
6-10.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)................................ 6-10
6-11.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function) ................... 6-10
6-12.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function) ................................ 6-11
6-13.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function) ..... 6-11
6-14.
Trigger Signal Specifications ........................................................... 6-11
6-15.
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications............ 6-11
6-16.
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications ......... 6-11
6-17.
Overload Measurement Specifications............................................. 6-12
6-18.
6-19.
6-20.
iii
5500A
Service Manual
6-21.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode ................................................................ 6-12
6-22.
Time Marker Mode........................................................................... 6-13
6-23.
Wave Generator Mode ..................................................................... 6-13
6-24.
Input Impedance Mode (Resistance) ................................................ 6-13
6-25.
Input Impedance Mode (Capacitance).............................................. 6-13
6-26.
Overload Mode................................................................................. 6-13
6-27.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.......................... 6-15
6-28.
SC600 Calibration Setup ...................................................................... 6-17
6-29.
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions ........ 6-18
6-30.
Overview of HP3458A Operation .................................................... 6-18
6-31.
Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements ................... 6-18
6-32.
Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave
6-33.
DC Voltage Calibration.................................................................... 6-21
6-34.
AC Voltage Calibration.................................................................... 6-21
6-35.
Wave Generator Calibration............................................................. 6-22
6-36.
Edge Amplitude Calibration............................................................. 6-22
6-37.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration...................................... 6-23
6-38.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration.......................................... 6-24
6-39.
6-40.
Low Frequency Calibration.......................................................... 6-24
High Frequency Calibration......................................................... 6-25
6-41.
Pulse Width Calibration ................................................................... 6-25
6-42.
MeasZ Calibration ............................................................................ 6-26
6-43.
6-44.
DC Voltage Verification................................................................... 6-29
6-45.
6-46.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-29
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-29
6-47.
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification................................................. 6-31
6-48.
6-49.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-31
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-33
6-50.
AC Voltage Frequency Verification................................................. 6-34
6-51.
Edge Amplitude Verification ........................................................... 6-35
6-52.
Edge Frequency Verification............................................................ 6-35
6-53.
Edge Duty Cycle Verification .......................................................... 6-36
6-54.
Edge Rise Time Verification ............................................................ 6-36
6-55.
Edge Abberation Verification........................................................... 6-38
6-56.
Tunnel Diode Pulser Drive Amplitude Verification......................... 6-39
6-57.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification .................................... 6-40
6-58.
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification..................................... 6-41
6-59.
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification .................................... 6-42
6-60.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification ........................................ 6-44
6-61.
6-62.
6-63.
6-64.
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness ............................ 6-44
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness............................ 6-44
Low Frequency Verification ........................................................ 6-46
High Frequency Verification........................................................ 6-46
6-65.
Time Marker Verification................................................................. 6-51
6-66.
Wave Generator Verification............................................................ 6-52
6-67.
6-68.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-52
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-53
6-69.
Pulse Width Verification .................................................................. 6-56
6-70.
Pulse Period Verification.................................................................. 6-57
6-71.
MeasZ Resistance Verification......................................................... 6-57
6-72.
MeasZ Capacitance Verification ...................................................... 6-58
6-73.
Overload Function Verification........................................................ 6-59
6-74.
SC600 Hardware Adjustments.............................................................. 6-60
iv
Contents
(continued)
6-75.
Equipment Required......................................................................... 6-60
6-76.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function ..................................... 6-60
6-77.
6-78.
6-79.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ............................. 6-62
6-80.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function............................. 6-62
6-81.
6-82.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-61
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance......................... 6-61
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-63
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations ................................................... 6-63
6-83.
6-84.
6-85.
6-86.
Voltage Function Specifications....................................................... 6-68
6-87.
Edge Function Specifications ........................................................... 6-69
6-88.
Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications .................................... 6-70
6-89.
Time Marker Function Specifications .............................................. 6-71
6-90.
Wave Generator Specifications ........................................................ 6-71
6-91.
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function .......... 6-72
6-92.
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function ....................... 6-72
6-93.
6-94.
6-95.
6-96.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode ................................................................ 6-72
6-97.
Time Marker Mode........................................................................... 6-72
6-98.
Wave Generator Mode ..................................................................... 6-73
6-99.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.......................... 6-75
6-100.
SC300 Calibration Setup ...................................................................... 6-77
6-101.
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions...................... 6-78
6-102.
Overview of HP3458A Operation .................................................... 6-78
6-103.
Setup for Square Wave Measurements............................................. 6-78
6-104.
DC Voltage Calibration.................................................................... 6-79
6-105.
AC Square Wave Voltage Calibration.............................................. 6-80
6-106.
Edge Amplitude Calibration............................................................. 6-81
6-107.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration...................................... 6-81
6-108.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration.......................................... 6-82
6-109.
6-110.
Low Frequency Calibration.......................................................... 6-83
High Frequency Calibration......................................................... 6-83
6-111.
6-112.
DC Voltage Verification................................................................... 6-84
6-113.
6-114.
6-116.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-84
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-84
6-115.
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification................................................. 6-87
6-117.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-87
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-89
6-118.
AC Voltage Frequency Verification................................................. 6-90
6-119.
Edge Amplitude Verification ........................................................... 6-91
6-120.
Edge Frequency Verification............................................................ 6-92
6-121.
Edge Duty Cycle Verification .......................................................... 6-93
6-122.
Edge Rise Time Verification ............................................................ 6-93
6-123.
Edge Abberation Verification........................................................... 6-95
6-124.
Leveled Sine Wave Reference Verification ..................................... 6-96
6-125.
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification..................................... 6-97
6-126.
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification .................................... 6-98
v
5500A
Service Manual
6-127.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification ........................................ 6-100
6-128.
6-129.
6-130.
6-131.
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness ............................ 6-100
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness............................ 6-100
Low Frequency Verification ........................................................ 6-102
High Frequency Verification........................................................ 6-102
6-132.
Time Marker Verification................................................................. 6-107
6-133.
Wave Generator Verification............................................................ 6-108
6-134.
6-135.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-109
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-109
6-136.
SC300 Hardware Adjustments.............................................................. 6-111
6-137.
Equipment Required......................................................................... 6-112
6-138.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function ..................................... 6-112
6-139.
6-140.
6-142.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-112
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ............................. 6-112
6-141.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function............................. 6-113
6-143.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-113
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations ................................................... 6-113
6-144.
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board.................................. 6-115
6-145.
Equipment Required......................................................................... 6-115
6-146.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function ..................................... 6-115
6-147.
6-148.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-115
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance......................... 6-115
6-149.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ............................. 6-116
6-150.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function............................. 6-117
6-151.
6-152.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-117
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations for Board 5500A-4004-1 .......... 6-118
6-153.
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations for Board 5500A-4004 ............. 6-120
6-154.
Adjusting the Rise Time for the Edge Function ............................... 6-122
6-155.
6-156.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-122
Adjusting the Edge Rise Time ..................................................... 6-122
vi
List of Tables
Table Title Page
3-18. AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Test (NORMAL).............................................. 3-25
3-32. AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (NORMAL)................................ 3-36
3-33. AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (AUX)......................................... 3-37
3-34. AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL) .................................... 3-38
vii
5500A
Service Manual
6-10. Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function) ........................... 6-11
6-13. Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications ............................... 6-11
6-19. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
.......................................................................... 6-30
6-20. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
............................................................................ 6-31
6-21. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
.......................................................................... 6-32
6-22. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
............................................................................ 6-33
6-41. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω
................................................................... 6-54
6-42. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω
.................................................................... 6-55
6-48. AC Square Wave Voltage and Edge Settings for the HP3458A............................ 6-78
6-49. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
.......................................................................... 6-85
viii
Contents
(continued)
6-50. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
........................................................................... 6-86
6-51. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
.......................................................................... 6-88
6-52. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
........................................................................... 6-89
6-70. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω
................................................................... 6-110
6-71. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω
.................................................................... 6-111
ix
5500A
Service Manual x
List of Figures
Figure Title Page
6-2. Equipment Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements ...................... 6-19
6-3. Equipment Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements .. 6-20
6-4. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard . 6-24
6-10. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard . 6-44
6-11. Connecting the HP E4418A Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D
6-12. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor 6-45
xi
5500A
Service Manual
6-19. Equipment Setup for SC300 Square Wave Measurements .................................... 6-79
6-20. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard . 6-82
6-25. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard . 6-100
6-26. Connecting the HP E4418A Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D
6-27. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor 6-101
xii
Chapter 1
Introduction and Specifications
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
General Specifications...................................................................... 1-6
DC Voltage Specifications ............................................................... 1-7
DC Current Specifications................................................................ 1-8
Resistance Specifications ................................................................. 1-9
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
1-9.
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications .......................................... 1-10
AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications........................................... 1-13
1-10.
Capacitance Specifications............................................................... 1-15
1-11.
Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple) Specifications ................ 1-16
1-12.
Temperature Calibration (RTD) Specifications................................ 1-17
1-13.
DC Power Specification Summary................................................... 1-18
1-14.
AC Power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) Specification Summary, PF=1 ............ 1-18
1-15.
Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications................................... 1-19
1-16.
Phase Specifications ......................................................................... 1-20
1-17.
Calculating Power Uncertainty......................................................... 1-21
1-18.
Additional Specifications...................................................................... 1-22
1-19.
Frequency Specifications.................................................................. 1-22
1-20.
Harmonics (2 nd
to 50 th
) Specifications.............................................. 1-22
1-21.
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications........ 1-23
1-22.
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave) Specifications .................................. 1-24
1-23.
AC Voltage, DC Offset Specifications............................................. 1-25
1-24.
AC Voltage, Square Wave Characteristics....................................... 1-25
1-25.
AC Voltage, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical)...................... 1-25
1-26.
AC Current (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications ........ 1-25
1-27.
AC Current (Non-Sinewave) Specifications .................................... 1-26
1-28.
AC Current, Square Wave Characteristics (typical)......................... 1-26
1-29.
AC Current, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical) ...................... 1-26
1-1
5500A
Service Manual
1-2
Introduction and Specifications
Introduction
1-1.
Introduction
The Fluke Model 5500A Multi-Product Calibrator (Figure 1-1) is a precise instrument that calibrates a wide variety of electrical measuring instruments. With the 5500A
Calibrator, you can calibrate precision multimeters that measure ac or dc voltage, ac or dc current, ac or dc power, resistance, capacitance, and temperature. With the Oscilloscope
Calibration option, you can use the 5500A Calibrator to calibrate analog and digital oscilloscopes. Specifications for the standard 5500A are provided at the end of this chapter. Specifications for the Oscilloscope Option are in Chapter 6.
XW
Warning
If the 5500A Calibrator is operated in any way not specified by the 5500A Operators Manual or other documentation provided by Fluke, protection provided by the 5500A may be impaired.
The 5500A Calibrator is a fully programmable precision source of the following:
•
DC voltage from 0 V to ±1020 V.
•
AC voltage from 1 mV to 1020 V, with output from 10 Hz to 500 kHz.
•
AC current from 0.01
µ
A to 11.0 A, with output from 10 Hz to 10 kHz.
•
DC current from 0 to ±11.0 A.
•
Resistance values from a short circuit to 330 M
Ω
.
•
Capacitance values from 330 pF to 1100
µ
F.
•
Simulated output for three types of Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs).
•
Simulated output for nine types of thermocouples.
Features of the 5500A Calibrator include the following:
•
Automatic meter error calculation using a simple output adjust knob.
•
Keys that multiply and divide the output value by 10 to simplify work on meters with calibration points at decade multiples.
•
Programmable entry limits to restrict levels that may be keyed into the 5500A, to prevent calling up a level that may be harmful to equipment or personnel.
•
Simultaneous output of voltage and current, up to 11 kW.
•
Simultaneous output of two voltages.
•
Extended bandwidth mode outputs multiple waveforms down to 0.01 Hz, and sine waves to 2 MHz.
•
Variable phase signal output.
•
Standard IEEE-488 (GPIB) interface, complying with ANSI/IEEE Standards
488.1-1987 and 488.2-1987.
•
EIA Standard RS-232-C serial data interface for printing, displaying, or transferring internally stored calibration constants, and for remote control of the 5500A.
•
Pass-through RS-232-C serial data interface for communicating with the Unit Under
Test (UUT).
•
Extensive automatic internal self-testing and diagnostics of analog and digital functions.
1
1-3
5500A
Service Manual
5500A
CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
60V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
TC
20V PK
MAX
+
STBY
/
7
4
1
OPR
8
5
2
EARTH SCOPE
BOOST
9
µ m
6 n k dBm
V
W
A
3 p
M
0
SHIFT
ENTER
F
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
SETUP
RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
EDIT
FIELD
POWER om001f.eps
Figure 1-1. 5500A Multi-Product Calibrator
1-2.
Service Information
In case of difficulty within the 1-year Warranty period, return the Calibrator to a Fluke
Service Center for Warranty repair. For out of Warranty repair, contact a Fluke Service
Center for a cost estimate.
This service manual provides instructions for verification of performance, calibration, and maintenance. If you choose to repair a malfunction, information in this manual can help you to determine which module (printed circuit assembly) has a fault. See Chapter 5 for cautions about handling the internal components.
1-3.
Specifications
The following paragraphs detail specifications for the 5500A Calibrator. The specifications are valid after allowing a warm-up period of 30 minutes, or twice the time the 5500A has been turned off. For example, if the 5500A has been turned off for 5 minutes, the warm-up period is 10 minutes.
All specifications apply for the temperature and time period indicated. For temperatures outside of tcal + 5
°
C (tcal is the ambient temperature when the 5500A was calibrated), the temperature coefficient is less than 0.1 times the 90-day specifications per
°
C (limited to 0
°
C to 50
°
C). These specifications also assume the 5500A Calibrator is zeroed every seven days or when the ambient temperature changes more than 5
°
C. (See “Zeroing the
Calibrator” in Chapter 4 of the 5500A Operator Manual.)
Also see additional specifications later in this chapter for information on extended specifications for ac voltage and current. The dimensional outline for the 5500A
Calibrator is shown in Figure A.
1-4
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
1
43.2 cm (17 in)
5500A
CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
TC
20V PK
MAX
STBY
7
4
1
OPR
8
EARTH
9
SCOPE
µ m
BOOST dBm
V
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
5
2
6
3 n k p
M
W
A
¡F
¡C
F
+
/ 0 SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
17.8 cm
(7 in)
47.0 cm (18.5 in) 6.4 cm
(2.5 in)
For Cable
Access
Figure A. 5500A Calibrator Dimensional Outline
om002f.ewps
1-5
5500A
Service Manual
1-4.
General Specifications
Warmup Time
Settling Time
Standard Interfaces
Temperature Performance
Twice the time since last warmed up, to a maximum of 30 minutes.
Less than 5 seconds for all functions and ranges except as noted.
IEEE-488 (GPIB), RS-232, 5725ª Amplifier
Temperature Coefficient
Relative Humidity
Altitude
Safety
[1]
•
Operating: 0 °C to 50 °C
•
Calibration (tcal): 15 °C to 35 °C
•
Storage: -20 °C to 70 °C
Temperature Coefficient for temperatures outside tcal +5 °C is 0.1X/ °C of the
90-day specification (or 1-year, as applicable) per °C.
•
Operating: <80 % to 30 °C, <70 % to 40 °C, <40 % to 50 °C
•
Storage: <95 %, non-condensing
•
Operating: 3,050 m (10,000 ft) maximum
•
Non-operating: 12,200 m (40,000 ft) maximum
Complies with IEC 1010-1 (1992-1); ANSI/ISA-S82.01-1994;
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1-92
Analog Low Isolation
EMC
Line Power
20 V
Designed to comply with FCC Rules Part 15; VFG 243/1991. If used in areas with
Electromagnetic fields of 1 to 3 V/m, resistance outputs have a floor adder of
0.508
Ω
. Performance not specified above 3 V/m. This instrument may be susceptible to electro-static discharge (ESD) from direct contact to the binding posts.
Good static aware practices should be followed when handling this and other pieces of electronic equipment.
•
Line Voltage (selectable): 100 V, 120 V, 220 V, 240 V
•
Line Frequency: 47 Hz to 63 Hz
•
Line Voltage Variation: ±10 % about line voltage setting
5500A Calibrator, 300 VA; 5725A Amplifier, 750 VA
Power Consumption
Dimensions
5500A Calibrator:
•
Height: 17.8 cm (7 in), standard rack increment, plus 1.5 cm (0.6 in) for feet on bottom of unit
•
Width, 43.2 cm (17 in), standard rack width
•
Depth: 47.3 cm (18.6 in) overall
5725A Amplifier:
•
Height, 13.3 cm (5.25 in), standard rack increment, plus 1.5 cm (0.6 in) for feet on bottom of unit
•
Width, 43.2 cm (17 in), standard rack width
•
Depth, 63.0 cm (24.8 in) overall.
5500A Calibrator, 22 kg (49 lb); 5725A Amplifier 32 kg (70 lb)
Weight (without options)
Absolute Uncertainty Definition
The 5500A specifications include stability, temperature coefficient, linearity, line and load regulation, and the traceability of the external standards used for calibration.
You do not need to add anything to determine the total specification of the 5500A for the temperature range indicated.
Specification Confidence
Interval
99 %
[1] After long periods of storage at high humidity, a drying out period (with the power on) of at least one week may be required.
1-6
1-5.
DC Voltage Specifications
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
Range
0 to 329.9999 mV
0 to 3.299999 V
0 to 32.99999 V
30 to 329.9999 V
100 to 1020.000 V
0 to 329.999 mV
0.33 to 3.3 V
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
0.005
0.004
0.004
0.0045
0.0045
0.03
0.03
± (% of output +
90 days
3
µ
V)
1 year
0.006
°
C
3
Stability
24 hours, ± 1
°
C
± (ppm output +
µ
V)
5 + 1
5
50
0.005
0.005
5
50
4 + 3
4 + 30
500 0.0055 500 4.5 + 300
1500 0.0055 1500 4.5 + 900
Auxiliary Output (dual output mode only)
[2]
350
350
0.04
0.04
350
350
30 + 100
30 + 100
Resolution
µ
V
0.1
1
10
100
1000
1
10
Maximum
Burden
[1]
50
Ω
10 mA
10 mA
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
[1] Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is < 5 m
Ω
for outputs
≥
0.33 V. The AUX output has an output resistance of < 1
Ω
.
[2] Two channels of dc voltage output are provided.
1
Range
0 to 329.9999 mV
0 to 3.299999 V
0 to 32.99999 V
30 to 329.9999 V
100 to 1020.000 V
Noise
Bandwidth 0.1 to 10 Hz p-p
± (ppm output +
µ
V)
Bandwidth 10 to 10 kHz rms
1
µ
V 4
10
µ
V 50
100
µ
V 600
10 ppm + 1 mV 20 mV
10 ppm + 5 mV
Auxiliary Output (dual output mode only)
[1]
20 mV
0 to 329.999 mV
0.33 to 3.3 V
5
µ
V 20
20
µ
V 200
[1] Two channels of dc voltage output are provided.
1-7
5500A
Service Manual
1-6.
DC Current Specifications
Range
0 to 3.29999 mA
0 to 32.9999 mA
0 to 329.999 mA
0 to 2.19999 A
0 to 11 A
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C
± (% of output +
µ
A)
90 days
0.010 0.05
0.008 0.25
0.013
0.01
1 year
0.05
0.25
0.008
0.023
0.038
0.03
3.3
44
330
330
0.01
0.03
0.06
3.3
44
330
5725A Amplifier
0.04 330
Resolution
0.01
µ
A
0.1
µ
A
1
µ
A
10
µ
A
100
µ
A
Compliance
Voltage
4.5 V
4.5 V
4.5 to 3.0 V
[1]
4.5 to 3.4 V
[2]
4.3 to 2.5 V
[3]
0 to 11 A 100 4 V
[1] The actual voltage compliance (Vc) is a function of current output (Io), and is given by the formula:
Vc = -5.05*Io+4.67. The highest compliance voltage is limited to 4.5 V.
[2] The actual voltage compliance (Vc) is a function of current output (Io), and is given by the formula:
Vc = -0.588*Io+4.69. The highest compliance voltage is limited to 4.5 V.
[3] The actual voltage compliance (Vc) is a function of current output (Io), and is given by the formula:
Vc = -0.204*Io+4.75. The highest compliance voltage is limited to 4.3 V.
Noise
Ranges
Bandwidth
0.1 to 10 Hz p-p
Bandwidth
10 to 10 kHz rms
0 to 3.29999 mA
0 to 32.9999 mA
0 to 329.999 mA
0 to 2.19999 A
0 to 11 A
0 to 11 A
20 nA
200 nA
2000 nA
20
µ
A
200
µ
A
5725A Amplifier
± 25 ppm of output + 200 nA
200 nA
2.0
µ
A
20
µ
A
1 mA
10 mA
2 mA
Maximum
Inductive
Load
1
µ
H
200
µ
H
200
µ
H
200
µ
H
200
µ
H
400
µ
H
1-8
1-7.
Resistance Specifications
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
Range
[1]
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C
± (% of output +
Ω
)
[2]
Resolution
Ω
Allowable
Current
[4]
90 days 1 year
0 to 10.99
Ω
11 to 32.999
Ω
33 to 109.999
Ω
110 to 329.999
Ω
330
Ω
to 1.09999 k
Ω
1.1 to 3.29999 k
Ω
3.3 to 10.9999 k
Ω
11 to 32.9999 k
Ω
33 to 109.999 k
Ω
110 to 329.999 k
Ω
330 k
Ω
to 1.09999 M
Ω
1.1 to 3.29999 M
Ω
3.3 to 10.9999 M
11 to 32.9999 M
33 to 109.999 M
110 to 330 M
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
1 to 125 mA
1 to 125 mA
1 to 70 mA
1 to 40 mA
0.007 0.06 0.009 0.06 0.01 250
0.007 0.06 0.009 0.06 0.01 250
0.007 0.6 0.009 0.6 0.1 25
0.007 0.6 0.009 0.6 0.1 25
0.008 6 0.011 6
0.009 6 0.012 6
0.011 55 0.015 55
1 2.5
1 2.5
10
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
A to 18 mA
A to 5 mA
A to 1.8 mA
A to 0.5 mA
A to 0.18 mA
A to 0.05 mA
250 nA to 0.018 mA
0.011 55 0.015 55 10 250 nA to 5 µ
A
0.045 550 0.06 550 100 25 nA to 1.8 µ
A
0.075 550 0.1 550 100 25 nA to 0.5 µ
A
0.4 5500 0.5 5500 1000 µ
A
0.4 16500 0.5 16500 1000 2.5 nA to 0.06 µ
A
[1] Continuously variable from 0 to 330 M
Ω
.
[2] Applies for COMP OFF (to the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals) and 2-wire and 4-wire compensation.
[3] The floor adder is improved to 0.006
Ω
(0 to 10.99
Ω
range) and 0.010
Ω
(11 to 329.999
Ω
) if the 5500A Calibrator is zeroed
(ohms zero or instrument zero) within 8 hours and temperature is ±1
°
C of zeroing ambient temperature.
[4] Do not exceed the largest current for each range. For currents lower than shown, the floor adder increases by Floor(new) =
Floor(old) x Imin/Iactual. For example, a 100
µ
A stimulus measuring 100
Ω
has a floor uncertainty of 0.01
Ω
x 1 mA/100
µ
A
= 0.1
Ω
.
Range
Maximum Voltage
[1]
Maximum Lead Resistance
[2]
0 to 10.99
Ω
11 to 32.999
Ω
33 to 109.999
Ω
110 to 329.999
Ω
330
Ω
to 1.09999 k
Ω
1.1 to 3.29999 k
Ω
3.3 to 10.9999 k
Ω
11 to 32.9999 k
Ω
33 to 109.999 k
Ω
110 to 329.999 k
Ω
330 k
Ω
to 1.09999 M
Ω
1.1 to 3.29999 M
Ω
3.3 to 10.9999 M
Ω
11 to 32.9999 M
Ω
33 to 109.999 M
Ω
110 to 330 M
Ω
1.37 V
4.12 V
7.7 V
13.2 V
19.8 V
16.5 V
19.8 V
16.5 V
19.8 V
16.5 V
19.8 V
16.5 V
19.8 V
16.5 V
19.8 V
19.8 V
<3.2
<3.2
<3.2
(n/a 110 k
<6
<6
<6
<6
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
<3.2
Ω
<6
Ω
and above)
[1] This is for the largest resistance for each range. The maximum voltage for other values is Imax (highest value of Allowable Current above) multiplied by Rout.
[2] Maximum lead resistance for no additional error in 2-wire COMP.
1
1-9
5500A
Service Manual
1-8.
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications
Range
1.0 to 32.999 mV
33 to 329.999 mV
0.33 to 3.29999 V
3.3 to 32.9999 V
33 to 329.999 V
330 to 1020 V
Frequency
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 to 20 kHz
20 to 50 kHz
50 to 100 kHz
100 to 500 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 to 20 kHz
20 to 50 kHz
50 to 100 kHz
100 to 500 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 to 20 kHz
20 to 50 kHz
50 to 100 kHz
100 to 500 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 to 20 kHz
20 to 50 kHz
50 to 100 kHz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 20 kHz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
330
250
60
60
300
1700
3300
2500
600
20
20
40
170
20
33
60
50
2600
5000
17000
6.6 mV
15
33
80 mV
100
500
0.53
0.11
0.02
0.06
0.10
0.17
0.38
0.11
0.03
0.19
0.26
0.75
0.19
0.04
0.08
0.12
0.17
0.06
0.14
0.17
0.04
0.06
0.07
0.04
0.15
0.15
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C
± (% of output +
µ
V)
90 days 1 year
0.26
0.11
0.15
20
20
20
0.35
0.15
0.2
20
20
20
0.7
0.15
0.03
0.08
0.14
0.24
0.5
0.15
0.04
0.25
0.35
1
0.25
0.05
0.1
0.16
0.24
0.08
0.19
0.24
0.05
0.08
0.09
0.05
0.20
0.20
330
250
60
60
300
1700
3300
2500
600
20
20
40
170
20
33
60
50
2600
5000
17000
6.6 mV
15
33
80 mV
100
500
Resolution
10
µ
V
100
µ
V
1 mV
10 mV
Max
Burden
[1]
1
µ
V 50
1
µ
V 50
10 mA
10 mA
5 mA, except
20 mA for
45 to 65 Hz
2 mA, except
6 mA for
45 to 65 Hz
1-10
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications (cont.)
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C
Range Frequency
± (% of output +
µ
V)
90 days 1 year
5725A Amplifier
100 to 1020 V
100 to 750 V
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 30 kHz
30 to 100 kHz
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.38
80 mV
100 mV
100 mV
500 mV
0.05
0.08
0.10
0.5
80 mV
100 mV
100 mV
500 mV
Auxiliary Output [dual output mode only]
[2]
10 to 329.999 mV
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
0.15
0.08
0.08
0.15
0.3
0.15
370
370
370
450
450
450
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.2
370
370
370
450
450
450
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
Resolution
10 mV
1
µ
V
Maximum
Burden
[1]
50 mA
70 mA
70 mA
70 mA
5 mA
1
0.33 to 3.29999 V
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.08
0.07
450
450
0.1
0.09
450
450 10
µ
V
5 mA
1 to 5 kHz 0.15 1400 0.2 1400
5 to 10 kHz 0.3 1400 0.4 1400
[1] Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is < 5 m
Ω
for outputs
≥
0.33 V. The AUX output resistance is < 1
Ω
. The maximum load capacitance is 500 pF, subject to the maximum burden current limits.
[2] There are two channels of voltage output. The maximum frequency of the dual output is 10 kHz.
1-11
5500A
Service Manual
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications (cont.)
Range Frequency
1.0 to 32.999 mV
33 to 329.999 mV
0.33 to 3.29999 V
3.3 to 32.9999 V
33 to 329.999 V
330 to 1000 V
100 to 1020 V
100 to 750 V
10 to 329.999 mV
0.33 to 3.29999 V
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 to 20 kHz
20 to 50 kHz
50 to 100 kHz
100 to 500 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 to 20 kHz
20 to 50 kHz
50 to 100 kHz
100 to 500 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 to 20 kHz
20 to 50 kHz
50 to 100 kHz
100 to 500 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 to 20 kHz
20 to 50 kHz
50 to 100 kHz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 20 kHz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
Maximum Distortion and Noise
10 Hz to 5 MHz Bandwidth
± (% output +
µ
V)
0.15 + 90
0.035 + 90
0.06 + 90
0.15 + 90
0.25 + 90
0.3 + 90
0.15 + 90
0.035 + 90
0.06 + 90
0.15 + 90
0.20 + 90
0.20 + 90
0.15 + 200
0.035 + 200
0.06 + 200
0.15 + 200
0.20 + 200
0.20 + 200
0.15 + 2 mV
0.035 + 2 mV
0.08 + 2 mV
0.2 + 2 mV
0.5 + 2 mV
0.15 + 10 mV
0.05 + 10 mV
0.6 + 10 mV
0.15 + 30 mV
0.07 + 30 mV
5725A Amplifier
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 30 kHz
30 to 100 kHz
0.07 %
0.15 %
0.3 %
0.4 %
Auxiliary Output (dual output mode only) 10 Hz to 100 kHz Bandwidth
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
0.2 + 200
0.06 + 200
0.08 + 200
0.3 + 200
0.6 + 200
0.2 + 200
0.06 + 200
0.08 + 200
0.3 + 200
0.6 + 200
1-12
1-9.
AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C
Range Frequency
± (% of output +
µ
A)
90 days 1 year
0.029 to 0.32999 mA
0.33 to 3.2999 mA
3.3 to 32.999 mA
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
0.19
0.09
45 Hz to 1 kHz 0.09
1 to 5 kHz 0.30
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
0.94
0.15
0.08
45 Hz to 1 kHz 0.08
1 to 5 kHz 0.15
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
0.45
0.15
20 to 45 Hz 0.08
45 Hz to 1 kHz 0.07
1 to 5 kHz 0.15
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.15
0.15
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
3
3
3
3
0.25
0.125
0.125
0.4
1.25
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.6
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
3
3
3
3
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.15
0.15
0.3
0.3
33 to 329.99 mA
5 to 10 kHz 0.45
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
0.15
0.08
45 Hz to 1 kHz 0.07
1 to 5 kHz 0.15
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
0.45
0.15
45 Hz to 1 kHz 0.08
3
30
30
30
30
30
300
300
0.6
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.2
0.6
0.2
0.1
3
30
30
30
30
30
300
300
0.33 to 2.19999 A
1 to 5 kHz 0.7 300 0.75 300
2.2 to 11 A
45 to 65 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
0.05
0.08
500 Hz to 1 kHz 0.25
2000
2000
2000
0.06
0.10
0.33
2000
2000
2000
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
Resolution
Compliance
Voltage
Max
Inductive
Load
0.01
µ
A
0.01
µ
A
3.0 V rms
3.0 V rms
1
µ
H
1
µ
H
0.1
1
10
µ
µ
A
µ
A
A
100
µ
A
3.0 V rms
200
µ
H,
10 to
500 Hz
1
µ
H,
500 Hz to
10 kHz
200
µ
H,
10 to
500 Hz
3.0 to
2.0 V rms
[1]
3.0 to
2.0 V rms
[2]
5
µ
H,
500 Hz to
10 kHz
200
µ
H,
45 to
500 Hz
5
µ
H,
500 Hz to
5 kHz
2.8 to
1.25 V rms
[3]
200
µ
H,
45 to 65 Hz
1
µ
H,
65 Hz to
1 kHz
1
1-13
5500A
Service Manual
AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications (cont.)
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C
Range Frequency
± (% of output +
µ
A)
90 days 1 year
Resolution
Compliance
Voltage
Max
Inductive
Load
1.5 to 11 A
45 Hz to 1 kHz 0.08
1 to 5 kHz 0.19
5 to 10 kHz 0.75
5725A Amplifier
100 0.1
5000
10000
0.25
1
100
5000
10000
100 3
[1] The actual voltage compliance (Vc) is a function of current output (Io), and is given by the formula:
Vc = -3.37*Io+3.11. The highest compliance voltage is limited to 3.0 V.
[2] The actual voltage compliance (Vc) is a function of current output (Io), and is given by the formula:
Vc = -0.535*Io+3.18. The highest compliance voltage is limited to 3.0 V.
[3] The actual voltage compliance (Vc) is a function of current output (Io), and is given by the formula:
Vc = -0.176*Io+3.19. The highest compliance voltage is limited to 2.8 V.
µ
H
Range
0.02 to 0.32999 mA
0.33 to 3.2999 mA
3.3 to 32.999 mA
33 to 329.99 mA
0.33 to 2.19999 A
2.2 to 11 A
1.5 to 11 A
Frequency
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 20 Hz
20 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
45 to 65 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
500 Hz to 1 kHz
5725A Amplifier
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
0.15
0.05
0.07
0.2
0.4
0.2
0.1
1.4
0.02
0.5
1.2
0.15
0.05
0.07
0.3
0.7
0.2
0.1
0.4
Maximum Distortion and Noise
10 Hz to 100 kHz Bandwidth
± (% output +
µ
A)
0.15 1.0
0.1
0.05
1.0
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.15
0.06
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
50
500
500
500
50
50
50
50
5
5
5
5
1.5
1.5
1.5
5
3 mA
3 mA
3 mA
0.05
0.12
0.5
1 mA
1 mA
1 mA
1-14
1-10.
Capacitance Specifications
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C
± (% of output + nF)
Frequency
Range
90 days 1 year
Resolution
0.33 to 0.4999 nF
0.5 to 1.0999 nF
1.1 to 3.2999 nF
3.3 to 10.999 nF
11 to 32.999 nF
33 to 109.99 nF
110 to 329.99 nF
0.33 to 1.0999
µ
F
1.1 to 3.2999
µ
F
3.3 to 10.999
µ
F
11 to 32.999
µ
F
33 to 109.99
µ
F
110 to 329.99
µ
F
330 to 1.1 mF
0.38
0.38
0.38
0.38
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.26
0.26
0.30
0.38
0.50
1
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.1
0.3
1
3
10
30
100
300
300
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.35
0.35
0.40
0.50
0.70
1
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.1
0.3
1
3
10
30
100
300
300
0.1 pF
0.1 pF
0.1 pF
1 pF
1 pF
10 pF
10 pF
100 pF
100 pF
1 nF
1 nF
10 nF
10 nF
100 nF
Specifications apply to both dc charge/discharge capacitance meters and ac RCL meters.
Allowed
50 to 1000 Hz
50 to 1000 Hz
50 to 1000 Hz
50 to 1000 Hz
50 to 1000 Hz
50 to 1000 Hz
50 to 1000 Hz
50 to 1000 Hz
50 to 1000 Hz
50 to 400 Hz
50 to 400 Hz
50 to 200 Hz
50 to 100 Hz
50 to 100 Hz
Typical for <1 %
Error
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
5 kHz
2 kHz
1.5 kHz
800 Hz
400 Hz
200 Hz
150 Hz
The output is continuously variable from 330 pF to 1.1 mF.
For all ranges, the maximum charge and discharge current is 150 mA pk or 30 mA rms. The peak voltage is 4 V, except the 330
µ
F to
1.1 mF range is limited to 1 V. The maximum lead resistance for no additional error in 2-wire COMP mode is 10
Ω
.
1
1-15
5500A
Service Manual
1-11.
Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple) Specifications
TC
Type
[1]
Range (
°
C)
[2]
Absolute Uncertainty
Source/Measure, tcal ± 5
°
C
± (
°
C)
[3]
90 days 1 year
TC
Type
[1]
Range (
°
C)
[2]
B
C
E
J
K
600 to 800
800 to 1000
1000 to 1550
1550 to 1820
0 to 150
150 to 650
650 to 1000
1000 to 1800
1800 to 2316
-250 to -100
-100 to -25
-25 to 350
350 to 650
650 to 1000
-210 to -100
-100 to -30
-30 to 150
150 to 760
760 to 1200
-200 to -100
-100 to -25
-25 to 120
120 to 1000
1000 to 1372
0.42
0.34
0.30
0.26
0.23
0.19
0.23
0.38
0.63
0.38
0.12
0.10
0.12
0.16
0.20
0.12
0.10
0.13
0.18
0.25
0.14
0.12
0.19
0.30
0.44
0.34
0.30
0.33
0.30
0.26
0.31
0.50
0.84
0.50
0.16
0.14
0.16
0.21
0.27
0.16
0.14
0.17
0.23
0.33
0.18
0.16
0.26
0.40
L
N
R
S
T
U
-200 to -100
-100 to 800
800 to 900
-200 to -100
-100 to -25
-25 to 120
120 to 410
410 to 1300
0 to 250
250 to 400
400 to 1000
1000 to 1767
0 to 250
250 to 1000
1000 to 1400
1400 to 1767
-250 to -150
-150 to 0
0 to 120
120 to 400
-200 to 0
0 to 600
The 10
µ
V/
°
C linear output mode has the same uncertainty as the 300 mV dc range.
Applies to both simulated thermocouple output and thermocouple measurement.
[1] Temperature standard ITS-90 or IPTS-68 is selectable.
[2] Resolution is 0.01
°
C.
[3] Does not include thermocouple error.
Absolute Uncertainty
Source/Measure, tcal ± 5
°
C
± (
°
C)
[3]
90 days 1 year
0.48
0.28
0.26
0.30
0.47
0.30
0.28
0.34
0.37
0.26
0.17
0.30
0.17
0.15
0.14
0.21
0.48
0.18
0.12
0.10
0.56
0.57
0.35
0.33
0.40
0.47
0.36
0.37
0.46
0.37
0.26
0.17
0.40
0.22
0.19
0.18
0.27
0.63
0.24
0.16
0.14
0.56
0.27 0.27
1-16
1-12.
Temperature Calibration (RTD) Specifications
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
RTD Type
Pt 395,
100
Ω
Pt 3926,
100
Ω
Pt 3916,
100
Ω
Pt 385,
200
Ω
Range
°
C
[1]
-200 to -190
-190 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 630
630 to 800
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 630
0.25
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.06
0.07
0.04
0.05
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.08
0.08
0.21
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.11
0.12
0.12
0.14
Absolute Uncertainty
tcal
±
5
°
C
± °
C
[2]
90 days 1 year
0.04
0.05
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.21
0.05
0.05
0.07
0.09
0.10
0.12
0.23
0.09
0.10
0.23
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.12
0.13
0.14
0.16
0.25
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.05
0.05
0.07
0.09
0.10
0.12
RTD Type
Pt 385,
500
Ω
Pt 385,
1000
Ω
PtNi 385,
120
Ω
(Ni120)
Cu 427,
10
Ω
[3]
Range
°
C
[1]
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
-100 to 260
0.05
0.06
0.22
0.06
0.07
0.13
0.09
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.05
Absolute Uncertainty
tcal
±
5
°
C
± °
C
[2]
90 days 1 year
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.07
0.08
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.08
0.09
0.07
0.07
0.23
0.08
0.08
0.14
0.11
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.3
[1] Resolution is 0.003
°
C.
[2] Applies for COMP OFF (to the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals) and 2-wire and 4-wire compensation.
[3] Based on MINCO Application Aid No. 18.
0.3
1
1-17
5500A
Service Manual
1-13.
DC Power Specification Summary
90 days
1 year
90 days
1 year
90 days
1 year
Voltage Range
33 mV to 1020 V
33 mV to 1020 V
Voltage Range
33 mV to 1020 V
33 mV to 1020 V
Voltage Range
33 mV to 1020 V
33 mV to 1020 V
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C, ± (% of Watts output)
[1]
5500A Calibrator Current Range
3.3 to 8.999 mA 9 to 32.999 mA 33 to 89.99 mA 90 to 329.99 mA
0.03
0.04
0.33 to 0.8999 A
0.02
0.03
0.9 to 2.1999 A
0.03
0.04
2.2 to 4.4999 A
0.02
0.03
4.5 to 11 A
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.12
5725A Amplifier Current Range
1.5 to 4.4999 A 4.5 to 11 A
0.10
0.07
0.08
0.06
0.09
[1] To determine dc power uncertainty with more precision, see the individual “DC Voltage Specifications” and “DC Current
Specifications” and “Calculating Power Uncertainty.”
1-14.
AC Power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) Specification Summary, PF=1
90 days
1 year
90 days
1 year
Voltage Range
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
100 to 1020 V
100 to 1020 V
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C, ± (% of Watts output)
[1]
Current Range
3.3 to 8.999 mA 9 to 32.999 mA 33 to 89.99 mA 90 to 329.99 mA
5500A Calibrator
0.30
0.20
0.40
0.25
5725A Amplifier
0.20
0.12
0.25
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.12
0.15
0.33 to 0.8999 A 0.9 to 2.1999 A
5500A Calibrator
0.25
0.20
0.35
0.25
0.20
0.25
2.2 to 4.4999 A
0.20
0.12
0.25
0.15
0.12
0.15
4.5 to 11 A
0.25
0.18
0.35
0.20
0.20
0.12
0.25
0.15
90 days
1 year
90 days
1 year
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
100 to 1020 V
100 to 1020 V
0.25
0.20
0.35
0.25
0.20
0.25
5725A Amplifier
0.12
0.15
1.5 to 4.4999 A
0.20
0.12
0.25
0.15
5500A Calibrator
90 days
1 year
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
33 mV to 1020 V
330 mV to 1020 V
0.25
0.15
0.35
0.20
[1] To determine uncertainty with more precision, see “Calculating Power Uncertainty.”
0.18
0.20
4.5 to 11 A
0.20
0.12
0.25
0.15
0.12
0.15
1-18
1-15.
Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
DC
Frequency
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 65 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
500 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
Voltages
(NORMAL)
0 to ± 1020 V
33 mV to 32.9999 V
33 mV to 1020 V
330 mV to 1020 V
3.3 to 1020 V
330 mV to 1020 V
3.3 to 1020 V
[1]
3.3 to 1020 V
[2]
Currents
0 to ± 11 A
3.3 mA to 2.19999 A
3.3 mA to 11 A
33 mA to 2.19999 A
33 mA to 11 A
33 mA to 11 A
33 mA to 2.19999 A
33 mA to 329.99 mA
Voltages
(AUX)
Power Factor
(PF)
0 to ± 3.3 V
10 mV to 3.3 V
10 mV to 3.3 V
100 mV to 3.3 V
100 mV to 3.3 V
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
100 mV to 3.3 V 1
100 mV to 3.3 V
[1]
1
1 to 3.3 V
[2]
1
[1] In dual volts, voltage is limited to 3.3 to 500 V in the NORMAL output.
[2] In dual volts, voltage is limited to 3.3 to 250 V in the NORMAL output.
•
The range of voltages and currents shown in “DC Voltage Specifications,” DC Current Specifications,” “AC Voltage (Sine Waves)
Specifications,” and “AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications” are available in the power and dual output modes (except minimum current for ac power is 0.33 mA). However, only those limits shown in this table are specified. See “Calculating Power Uncertainty” to determine the uncertainty at these points.
•
The phase adjustment range for dual ac outputs is 0 to ± 179.99 degrees. The phase resolution for dual ac outputs is 0.02 degree.
1
1-19
5500A
Service Manual
1-16.
Phase Specifications
10 to 65 Hz
0.15
°
[1]
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C, (
∆Φ
Degrees)
65 to 500 Hz 500 Hz to 1 kHz 1 to 5 kHz 5 to 10 kHz
[1] For 33 to 1000 V output, burden current <6 mA. For 6 to 20 mA burden current (33 to 330 V), the phase uncertainty is 0.4 degree.
[2] For 33 to 1000 V output, burden current <2 mA. For 2 to 5 mA burden current (33 to 330 V), the phase uncertainty is 1.5 degrees.
[3] For 33 to 1000 V output, burden current <2 mA. For 2 to 5 mA burden current (33 to 330 V), the phase uncertainty is 5 degrees.
Phase (
Φ
)
Watts
Degrees
Phase (
Φ
)
VARs
Degrees
PF
10 to 65 Hz
Power Uncertainty Adder due to Phase Error ± (%)
65 to 500 Hz 500 Hz to 1 kHz 1 to 5 kHz 5 to 10 kHz
To calculate exact ac Watts power adders due to phase uncertainty for values not shown, use the following formula:
Adder
( )
= −
Cos
(
+
Cos
( )
)
)
.
For example: for a PF of .9205 (
Φ
= 23) and a phase uncertainty of
Adder
( )
= −
Cos
(23
Cos
+
.
( )
15 )
)
=
0 11%
.
∆Φ
= 0.15, the ac Watts power adder is:
1-20
1-17.
Calculating Power Uncertainty
Introduction and Specifications
Overall uncertainty for power output in Watts (or VARs) is based on the root sum square (rss) of the individual uncertainties in percent for the selected voltage, current, and power factor parameters:
Specifications
1
U power
=
U
2 voltage
+
U
2 current
+
U
2
PFadder
Watts uncertainty
VARs uncertainty
U
VARs
=
U
2 voltage
+
U
2 current
+
U
2
VARsadder
Because there are an infinite number of combinations, you should calculate the actual ac power uncertainty for your selected parameters. The method of calculation is best shown in the following examples (using 90-day specifications):
Example 1 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 60 Hz, Power Factor = 1.0 (
Φ
=0)
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 60 Hz is 0.04 % + 6.6 mV, totaling:
100 V x .0004 = 40 mV added to 6.6 mV = 46.6 mV. Expressed in percent:
46.6 mV/100 V x 100 = 0.047 % (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0.08 % + 300
µ
A, totaling:
1 A x .0008 = 800
µ
A added to 300
µ
A = 1.1 mA. Expressed in percent:
1.1 mA/1 A x 100 = 0.11 % (see “AC Current (Sine Waves) Specifications”).
PF Adder Watts Adder for PF = 1 (
Φ
=0) at 60 Hz is 0 % (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total Watts Output Uncertainty =
U power
=
0 .
047
2
+
0 .
11
2
+
0
2
=
0 .
12 %
Example 2 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 400 Hz, Power Factor = 0.5 (
Φ
=60)
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 400 Hz is 0.04 % + 6.6 mV, totaling:
100 V x .0004 = 40 mV added to 6.6 mV = 46.6 mV. Expressed in percent:
46.6 mV/100 V x 100 = 0.047 % (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0.08 % + 300
µ
A, totaling:
1 A x .0008 = 800
µ
A added to 300
µ
A = 1.1 mA. Expressed in percent:
1.1 mA/1 A x 100 = 0.11 % (see “AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
PF Adder Watts Adder for PF = 0.5 (
Φ
=60) at 400 Hz is 2.73 % (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total Watts Output Uncertainty =
U power
=
0 .
047
2
+
0 .
11
2
+
2 .
73
2
=
2 .
73 %
VARs When the Power Factor approaches 0.0, the Watts output uncertainty becomes unrealistic because the dominant characteristic is the VARs (volts-amps-reactive) output. In these cases, calculate the Total VARs Output Uncertainty, as shown in example 3:
Example 3 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 60 Hz, Power Factor = 0.0872 (
Φ
=85)
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 60 Hz is 0.04 % + 6.6 mV, totaling:
100 V x .0004 = 40 mV added to 6.6 mV = 46.6 mV. Expressed in percent:
46.6 mV/100 V x 100 = 0.047 % (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0.08 % + 300
µ
A, totaling:
1 A x .0008 = 800
µ
A added to 300
µ
A = 1.1 mA. Expressed in percent:
1.1 mA/1 A x 100 = 0.11 % (see “AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
VARs Adder VARs Adder for
Φ
=85 at 60 Hz is 0.02 % (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total VARS Output Uncertainty =
U
VARs
= 0 .
047
2
+
0 .
11
2
+
0 .
02
2
=
0 .
12 %
1-21
5500A
Service Manual
1-18.
Additional Specifications
The following paragraphs provide additional specifications for the 5500A Calibrator ac voltage and ac current functions.
These specifications are valid after allowing a warm-up period of 30 minutes, or twice the time the 5500A has been turned off. All extended range specifications are based on performing the internal zero-cal function at weekly intervals, or when the ambient temperature changes by more than 5
°
C. (See Chapter 4, Front Panel Operations in the 5500A Operator
Manual.)
1-19.
Frequency Specifications
Frequency
Range
Resolution
0.01 - 119.99 Hz
120.0 - 1199.9 Hz
1.200 - 11.999 kHz
12.00 - 119.99 kHz
120.0 - 1199.9 kHz
1.200 - 2.000 MHz
[1] ± (25 ppm + 15 mHz) above 10 kHz
0.01 Hz
0.1 Hz
1.0 Hz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ± 5
°
C
± (PPM + mHz)
25
25
25
1
1
1
[1]
25
25
25
15
15
15
Jitter
2
µ s
2
µ s
2
µ s
140 ns
140 ns
140 ns
1-20.
Harmonics (2 nd
to 50 th
) Specifications
Fundamental
Frequency
[1]
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 65 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
500 to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
Voltages
NORMAL Terminals
33 mV to 32.9999 V
33 mV to 1020 V
33 mV to 1020 V
330 mV to 1020 V
3.3 to 1020 V
Currents
3.3 mA to 2.19999 A
3.3 mA to 11 A
33 mA to 11 A
33 mA to 11 A
33 mA to 2.19999 A
Voltages
AUX Terminals
10 mV to 3.3 V
10 mV to 3.3 V
100 mV to 3.3 V
100 mV to 3.3 V
100 mV to 3.3 V
Amplitude
Uncertainty
Same % of output as the equivalent single output, but twice the floor adder.
Phase uncertainty for harmonic outputs is 1 degree, or the phase uncertainty shown in “Phase Specifications” for the particular output, whichever is greater. For example, the phase uncertainty of a 400 Hz fundamental output and 10 kHz harmonic output is 10 degrees
(from “Phase Specifications”). Another example, the phase uncertainty of a 60 Hz fundamental output and a 400 Hz harmonic output is
1 degree.
[1] The maximum frequency of the harmonic output is 10 kHz. For example, if the fundamental output is 5 kHz, the maximum selection is the 2
200 Hz. nd
harmonic (10 kHz). All harmonic frequencies (2 nd
to 50 th
) are available for fundamental outputs between 10 and
Example of determining Amplitude Uncertainty in a Dual Output Harmonic Mode
What are the amplitude uncertainties for the following dual outputs?
NORMAL (Fundamental) Output:
100 V, 100 Hz ................................................. From “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications” the single output specification for 100 V, 100 Hz, is 0.015 %
+
2 mV. For the dual output in this example, the specification is 0.015 %
+
4 mV as the 0.015 % is the same, and the floor is twice the value (2 x 2 mV).
AUX (50 th
Harmonic) Output:
100 mV, 5 kHz ................................................ From “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications” the auxiliary output specification for 100 mV, 5 kHz, is 0.15 %
+
450 mV. For the dual output in this example, the specification is 0.15 %
+
900 mV as the
0.15 % is the same, and the floor is twice the value (2 x 450 mV).
1-22
Introduction and Specifications
Additional Specifications
1-21.
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
Range Frequency tcal ± 5
°
C,
± (% of output + % of range)
% Output % Range
1.0 to 33 mV
34 to 330 mV
0.4 to 3.3 V
4 to 33 V
0.3 to 3.3 V
10 to 330 mV
0.4 to 3.3 V
Maximum Voltage Resolution
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
0.01 to 10 Hz 5.0 % 0.5 %
Two digits, e.g., 25 mV
Three digits
Two digits
Two digits
10 to 500 kHz
500 kHz to 1 MHz
1 to 2 MHz
(See AC Voltage (Sine Waves) Specifications)
-8 dB at 1 MHz, typical
Two digits
-32 dB at 2 MHz, typical
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 10 kHz
5.0 % 0.5 %
Three digits
Two digits
(See AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications)
1
1-23
5500A
Service Manual
1-22.
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave) Specifications
Triangle Wave &
Truncated Sine
Range p-p
[1]
Frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C,
± (% of output + % of range)
[2]
% Output % Range
Maximum
Voltage Resolution
2.9 to 92.999 mV
93 to 929.999 mV
0.93 to 9.29999 V
9.3 to 92.9999 V
93 to 929.999 mV
0.93 to 9.29999 V
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
0.01 to 10 Hz 5.0 0.5
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25
0.25
0.5
0.25
1 to 20 kHz 0.5
20 to 100 kHz
[3]
5.0
0.25
0.5
0.01 to 10 Hz
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
5.0 0.5
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
0.25
0.25
5.0
0.5
0.25
0.5
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
[1] To convert p-p to rms for triangle wave, multiply the p-p value by 0.2886751. To convert p-p to rms for truncated sine wave, multiply the p-p value by 0.2165063.
[2] Uncertainty is stated in p-p. Amplitude is verified using an rms-responding DMM.
[3] Uncertainty for truncated sine outputs is typical over this frequency band.
Square Wave
Range p-p
[1]
2.9 to 65.999 mV
66 to 659.999 mV
0.66 to 6.59999 V
6.6 to 65.9999 V
66 to 659.999 mV
0.66 to 6.59999 V
Frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C
± (% of output + % of range)
[2]
% Output % Range
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
5.0
0.25
0.25
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.25
0.25
20 to 100 kHz 5.0 0.5
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
5.0
0.25
0.25
5.0
0.5
0.5
0.25
0.5
[1] To convert p-p to rms for square wave, multiply the p-p value by .5000000.
[2] Uncertainty is stated in p-p. Amplitude is verified using an rms-responding DMM.
Maximum
Voltage Resolution
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
1-24
1-23.
AC Voltage, DC Offset Specifications
Introduction and Specifications
Additional Specifications
Range
[1]
(Normal Channel)
3.3 to 32.999 mV
33 to 329.999 mV
0.33 to 3.29999 V
3.3 to 32.9999 V
Offset Range
[2]
Max Peak
Signal
Sine Waves (rms)
0 to 50 mV
0 to 500 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 50 V
80 mV
800 mV
8 V
55 V
Triangle Waves and Truncated Sine Waves (p-p)
1-Year Absolute Offset
Uncertainty, tcal ± 5
°
C
[3]
± (% Output (dc) +
µ
V)
0.1 + 33
0.1 + 330
0.1 + 3300
0.1 + 33 mV
9.3 to 92.999 mV
93 to 929.999 mV
0.93 to 9.29999 V
9.3 to 92.9999 V
6.6 to 65.999 mV
66 to 659.999 mV
0.66 to 6.59999 V
6.6 to 65.9999 V
0 to 50 mV
0 to 500 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 50 V
80 mV
800 mV
8 V
55 V
Square Waves (p-p)
0 to 50 mV 80 mV
0 to 500 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 50 V
800 mV
8 V
55 V
0.1 + 93
0.1 + 930
0.1 + 9300
0.1 + 93 mV
0.1 + 66
0.1 + 660
0.1 + 6600
0.1 + 66 mV
[1] Offsets are not allowed on ranges above the highest range shown above.
[2] The maximum offset value is determined by the difference between the peak value of the selected voltage output and the allowable maximum peak signal. For example, a 10 V p-p square wave output has a peak value of 5 V, allowing a maximum offset up to ± 50 V to not exceed the 55 V maximum peak signal. The maximum offset values shown above are for the minimum outputs in each range.
[3] For frequencies 0.01 to 10 Hz, and 500 kHz to 2 MHz, the offset uncertainty is 5 % of output, ± 1 % of the offset range.
1
1-24.
AC Voltage, Square Wave Characteristics
Rise Time
@ 1 kHz
Typical
Settling Time
@ 1 kHz
Typical
Overshoot
@ 1 kHz
Typical
Duty Cycle Range Duty Cycle Uncertainty
[1]
<1
µ s
<10
µ s to 1 % of final value
<2 %
1 % to 99 %, <3.3 V p-p,
0.01 Hz to 100 kHz
± (0.8 % of period +140 ns) for frequencies >10 kHz; + (0.8 % of period + 2
µ s) for frequencies
≤
10 kHz.
[1] For duty cycles of 10.00 % to 90.00 %.
1-25.
AC Voltage, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical)
Linearity to 1 kHz
0.3 % of p-p value, from 10 % to 90 % point
Aberrations
<1 % of p-p value, with amplitude >50 % of range
1-26.
AC Current (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
Range Frequency tcal ± 5
°
C,
± (% of output + % of range)
% Output % Range
All current ranges, <330 mA 0.01 to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 10 kHz
Maximum
Current Resolution
5.0 0.5 2 digits each range
(See AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications)
1-25
5500A
Service Manual
1-27.
AC Current (Non-Sinewave) Specifications
Trianglewave &
Truncated Sinewave
Ranges
[1]
2.9 to 92.999 mA
93 to 929.999 mA
0.93 to 6.19999 A
6.2 to 31 A
Frequency
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
45 to 500 Hz
500 to 1 kHz
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal + 5
°
C,
+ (% of output + % of range)
[2]
Maximum
Current
%Output %Range
5.0 0.5
Resolution
Two digits, e.g., 75 mA
0.25
0.25
5.0
5.0
0.25
0.25
5.0
5.0
0.5
5.0
2.0
5.0
0.5
0.25
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
[1] All waveforms are peak-to-peak output ranges.
[2] Uncertainty is stated in peak-to-peak. Amplitude is verified using an rms-responding DMM.
Six digits on each range
Two digits
Six digits on each range
Two digits
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Squarewave
Ranges
[1]
Frequency
2.9 to 65.999 mA
66 to 659.999 mA
0.66 to 4.39999 A
4.4 to 22 A
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
45 to 500 Hz
500 to 1 kHz
[1] All waveforms are peak-to-peak output ranges.
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal + 5
°
C,
+ (% of output + % of range)
[2]
Maximum
Current
%Output %Range
5.0 0.5
Resolution
Two digits, e.g., 50 mA
0.25
0.25
5.0
5.0
0.25
0.25
5.0
5.0
0.5
5.0
2.0
5.0
0.5
0.25
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
[2] Uncertainty is stated in peak-to-peak. Amplitude is verified using an rms-responding DMM.
Six digits on each range
Two digits
Six digits on each range
Two digits
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
1-28.
AC Current, Square Wave Characteristics (typical)
Range
I<4.4 A @ 400 Hz
Rise Time Settling Time
25
µ s 40
Overshoot
<10 % for loads <100
Ω
1-29.
AC Current, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical)
Linearity to 400 Hz
0.3 % of p-p value, from 10 % to 90 % point
Aberrations
<1 % of p-p value, with amplitude >50 % of range
1-26
Chapter 2
Theory of Operation
2-2.
Encoder Assembly (A2)........................................................................ 2-4
2-3.
Synthesized Impedance Assembly (A5) ............................................... 2-4
2-4.
DDS Assembly (A6)............................................................................. 2-5
2-5.
Current Assembly (A7)......................................................................... 2-6
2-6.
Voltage Assembly (A8) ........................................................................ 2-7
2-7.
Main CPU Assembly (A9).................................................................... 2-8
Supplies .....................................................................................
2-9. Outguard
2-10. Inguard
2-1
5500A
Service Manual
2-2
Theory of Operation
Introduction
2-1.
Introduction
This chapter provides a block diagram discussion of the calibrator’s analog and digital sections. Figure 2-1 shows the arrangement of assemblies inside the 5500A. The
Oscilloscope Calibration Option is described in the Options chapter.
The 5500A produces calibration outputs of the following functions and ranges:
•
DC voltage from 0 V to
±
1000 V.
•
AC voltage from 1 mV to 1000 V, with output from 10 Hz to 500 kHz.
•
AC current from 0.01
µ
A to 11.0 A, with output from 10 Hz to 10 kHz.
•
DC current from 0 to
±
11.0 A.
•
Resistance values from a short circuit to 330 M
Ω
.
•
Capacitance values from 330 pF to 1100
µ
F.
•
Simulated output for three types of Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs).
•
Simulated output for nine types of thermocouples.
2
Main CPU (A9)
Filter (A12)
Voltage (A8)
Current (A7)
DDS (A6)
Synthesized Impedance (A5)
Oscilloscope Calibration Option (A4)
Encoder (A2)
Keyboard (A1)
FRONT
Motherboard (A3)
Figure 2-1. 5500A Internal Layout
om003f.eps
2-3
5500A
Service Manual
2-2.
Encoder Assembly (A2)
The Encoder assembly (A2) has its own microprocessor and is in communication with the
Main CPU (A9) on the Rear Panel through a serial link. Memory for the Encoder assembly is contained in EPROM. The Encoder assembly handles the interface to the
Keyboard assembly (A1).
2-3.
Synthesized Impedance Assembly (A5)
The Synthesized Impedance assembly (A5) generates variable resistance and capacitance outputs. It uses discrete resistors and capacitors as references, with an amplifier in series.
Figure 2-2 is a block diagram of the synthesized resistance function. Figure 2-3 is a block diagram of the synthesized capacitance function.
For resistance synthesis, there is a two-wire compensation circuit, an input amplifier, two
DACs (coarse and fine) with offset adjust, and an output LO buffer.
For capacitance synthesis, there is a two-wire compensation circuit, selectable references, an input amplifier, two DACs (coarse and fine), and an output LO buffer.
K
NORMAL
HI
R ref
R x
=
SCOM
R x
= (1 + K) • R ref
NORMAL LO
SCOM
DAC
-1 om004f.eps
Figure 2-2. Synthesized Resistance Function
2-4
Theory of Operation
DDS Assembly (A6)
2
K
C ref
DAC
NORMAL
HI
-1
C x
=
C x
= (1 + K) • C ref
NORMAL
LO
SCOM om005f.eps
Figure 2-3. Synthesized Capacitance Function
2-4.
DDS Assembly (A6)
The DDS (Direct Digital Synthesis) assembly (A6) contains the following blocks:
•
References for all voltage and current functions.
•
Gain determining elements for voltage functions and thermocouple measuring and sourcing.
• ±
7 V references.
•
Thermocouple sourcing and measuring amplifier.
•
An A/D (Analog-to-Digital) measurement system for monitoring all functions.
•
Self calibration circuitry.
•
Zero calibration circuitry.
•
Precision voltage channel DAC (VDAC).
•
Precision current channel DAC (IDAC).
•
Dual-channel DDS (Direct Digital Synthesizer).
•
Inguard CPU that controls relays and latches throughout the analog assemblies.
These functional blocks, when used with the Voltage (A8) and/or Current (A7) assemblies, provide single or dual channel ac and dc volts, amps, and watts, offsettable and nonsinusoidal waveforms, duty cycle, thermocouple measuring and sourcing, internal calibration and diagnostics, and digital control over all the analog assemblies.
DACS are used to control the level of dc signals and to control the amplitude of ac signals.
2-5
5500A
Service Manual
The dual-channel DDS (Direct Digital Synthesizer) generates finely stepped digital waveforms that take the form of sine, triangular, and other waveforms.
2-5.
Current Assembly (A7)
The Current assembly outputs six current ranges (330 uA, 3.3 mA, 33 mA, 330 mA, 2.2
A, and 11 A) and two voltage ranges (330 mV and 3.3 V) to the AUX outputs. The
330 uA range is only available in ac. If a 5725A Amplifier is attached, 5500A current can also be sourced through the 5725A binding posts.
The Current assembly works together with the DDS (A6) assembly. The Filter (A12) assembly provides the high current power supplies.
The Current assembly (A7) contains the following blocks:
•
A floating supply.
•
Several stages of transconductance amplifier.
•
Current-sensing shunts and shunt amplifier. (These are the accuracy-setting elements.)
•
AUX voltage function.
Operating power for the Current assembly is filtered by the Filter assembly (A12). Its common is separated from SCOM by a shunt resistor.
Figure 2-4 is a block diagram of the current function. Note that the DDS assembly works together with the Current assembly to generate current outputs.
±
IDAC
DDS Assembly (A6)
IDAC Error
Amp
DDS
Ch 1 dc ac
Current Assembly (A7)
Current
Amp
Ref
SCOM dc ac
AC
Converter
AUX HI
SCOM
Shunt
Amp
SCOM
Shunt
AUX LO
SCOM
ICOM om006f.eps
Figure 2-4. Current Function
2-6
Theory of Operation
Voltage Assembly (A8)
2-6.
Voltage Assembly (A8)
The Voltage assembly (A8) generates dc and ac voltage outputs in the range 3.3 V and above. It also provides all the inguard supplies referenced to SCOM as described under the heading “Power Supplies.”
Figure 2-5 is a block diagram of the voltage function and shows the signal paths for dc and ac voltage outputs. The DAC shown in the figure is VDAC, which resides on the
DDS assembly. Note that the voltage amplifier for outputs
≥
3.3 V resides on the Voltage assembly, but the amplifier for voltage outputs
<
3.3 V is on the DDS assembly.
2
_
+
Error
Amp
Ref
VDAC dc ac
AC
Converter
± 1
DDS dc ac
Voltage
Amp
( > 3.3V on A8,
< 3.3V on A6 )
±G
NORMAL
HI
NORMAL
LO
Sense
Amp
_
+
SCOM
SCOM om007f.eps
Figure 2-5. Voltage Function
2-7
5500A
Service Manual
2-7.
Main CPU Assembly (A9)
The Main CPU (A9) attached to the rear panel assembly communicates with the following assemblies:
•
Inguard CPU on the DDS assembly (A6)
•
Display assembly CPU
•
Serial and IEEE interfaces
•
External amplifier (5725A)
The main CPU memory is Flash ROM.
Each analog assembly has the same bus structure:
•
One or more Chip Select lines
•
Common data bus that connects to the motherboard, latched in by latches
•
A Fault line that sets all modules to a safe state in case of malfunction
Signals to the front panel jacks are routed by output relays on the motherboard.
2-8.
Power Supplies
AC line voltage is applied through a line filter to a power module in the rear panel that provides switching for four line voltages. The outputs of the power module are wired directly to the primaries of the mains transformer. The safety ground wire is attached from the power module to the rear panel.
Major internal grounds are SCOM, which is tied to OUTPUT LO and the guard shell,
ICOM, which is the internal ground for the current function, and GCOM, which is the outguard common and is tied to earth ground.
2-9.
Outguard Supplies
The motherboard generates the outguard power supplies: +12VG, -12VG, and +5VG. All the transformer connections for the outguard supplies come through one bundle of wires connected to the motherboard with P1. A row of test points is provided in front of the fan for the raw and regulated supplies. The supplies are fused on the motherboard. It is unlikely the fuses will blow unless there is another fault since the regulators will current limit below the fuse ratings. The outguard supplies are used only by the CPU assembly
(A9) and Encoder (A2) assemblies.
2-10.
Inguard Supplies
The inguard supplies are located on the Voltage assembly (A8). The transformer connections (inguard SCOM referenced) are connected to the Motherboard (A3) via
J209. Fuses for each of the supplies are located on the Motherboard. It is unlikely the fuses will blow unless there is another fault since the regulators will current limit below the fuse ratings.
Filter capacitors for the high-current supply for the Current assembly (A7) are located on the Filter assembly (A12).
The inguard SCOM referenced supplies are +15 V, -15 V, +5 V, -5 V, and +5RLH. The
+5 V and +5RLH supplies share the same raw supply. The +5RLH supply is used exclusively as a relay driver and is nominally about 6.3 V. Test points for these supplies are located in a row across the top of the Voltage assembly. The 65 V supplies are rectified and filtered on the Motherboard but regulated on the Voltage assembly (A8).
2-8
Chapter 3
Calibration and Verification
3-3.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification ..................... 3-3
3-4. Starting
How the Calibration Procedure Works............................................. 3-4
3-5.
3-6. DC
3-7. AC
3-8. Thermocouple
Current .......................................................................................
3-9. DC
3-10. AC
3-11.
3-12.
AUX DC Volts ................................................................................. 3-8
AUX AC Volts ................................................................................. 3-9
3-15.
Capacitance, Four-Wire Comp ......................................................... 3-14
NORMAL Volts and AUX Volts Phase........................................... 3-15
3-17.
3-18.
3-19.
Volts and AUX Current Phase ......................................................... 3-15
Remote Commands for 5500A Calibration ...................................... 3-16
3-21.
3-22.
3-23.
3-24.
Calibration Shifts Report, Printout Format....................................... 3-18
Calibration Shifts Report, Spreadsheet Format ................................ 3-19
Calibration Constant Report, Printout Format.................................. 3-19
Calibration Constants Report, Spreadsheet Format.......................... 3-20
3-26.
Zeroing the Calibrator ...................................................................... 3-20
DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)................................ 3-21
3-27.
3-28.
3-29.
DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (AUX) ........................................ 3-21
DC Current Amplitude Accuracy ..................................................... 3-22
3-30. Resistance
3-31.
3-32.
3-33.
3-34.
Accuracy......................................................................... 3-23
Resistance DC Offset Measurement................................................. 3-24
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)................................ 3-25
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (AUX) ........................................ 3-27
AC Current Amplitude Accuracy ..................................................... 3-28
Accuracy ...................................................................... 3-29
3-1
5500A
Service Manual
3-44.
3-45.
3-46.
3-47.
3-48.
3-49.
3-50.
3-36.
3-37.
3-38.
3-39.
3-40.
3-41.
3-42.
3-43.
Thermocouple Measurement Accuracy............................................ 3-31
Thermocouple Sourcing Accuracy ................................................... 3-31
Thermocouple Measuring Accuracy ................................................ 3-31
DC Power Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL) .................................. 3-32
DC Power Amplitude Accuracy (AUX)........................................... 3-32
AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Voltage).............................. 3-33
AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Current) .............................. 3-33
AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Power) ................................ 3-34
Phase and Frequency Accuracy........................................................ 3-34
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (NORMAL) .......... 3-36
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (AUX)................... 3-37
AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)............... 3-38
AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (AUX) ....................... 3-39
DC Voltage Offset Accuracy............................................................ 3-39
AC Voltage Accuracy with a DC Offset .......................................... 3-40
3-2
Calibration and Verification
Introduction
3-1.
Introduction
Use this chapter as a guide to calibration and for verification of the 5500A’s performance to specifications. You should recalibrate at the end of either a 90-day or
1-year calibration interval. If you recalibrate every 90 days, use the 90-day specifications, which provide higher performance. Use the Verification procedure or any part thereof any time you need to verify that the Calibrator is meeting its specifications.
3
3-2.
Calibration
The standard 5500A has no internal hardware adjustments. The Oscilloscope Option has hardware adjustments; see Chapter 7. All calibration is done with the covers on, using software calibration constants. A calibration routine that prompts you through the entire procedure is built into the 5500A. Calibration occurs in the following major steps:
1. The 5500A sources specific output values and you measure the outputs using traceable measuring instruments of higher accuracy.
2. You enter the measured results either manually through the front panel keyboard or remotely with an external terminal or computer.
3. The 5500A computes a software correction factor and stores it in volatile memory.
4. When the calibration process is compete, you are prompted to either store all the correction factors in nonvolatile memory or discard them and start over.
For routine calibration, all steps except frequency and phase are necessary. All the routine calibration steps are available from the front panel interface as well as the remote interface (IEEE-488 or serial). Frequency and phase calibration are recommended after instrument repair, and are available only by way of the remote interface (IEEE-488 or serial). Remote commands for calibration are described at the end of this chapter.
3-3.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
The equipment listed in Table 3-1 is required to calibrate and verify performance of the
5500A. If a specified instrument is not available, you can substitute an instrument that assures a 4:1 Test Uncertainty Ratio.
3-3
5500A
Service Manual
Equipment
Test Lead Kit
8-1/2 digit DMM
Mercury Thermometer
100 mV dc source
Table 3-1. Required Equipment for Calibration and Verification
5100B
Recommended Model
Fluke 5500A/Leads
HP 3458A
ASTM 56C
Fluke 5500A, 5700A, 5440B, or
Phase Meter
LCR Meter
Clarke-Hess 6000
Fluke PM6304C with PM9540/BAN test lead set
Counter/Timer Fluke PM6666
AC Measurement Standard Fluke 5790A
Shunt
Resistance Standard
Fluke Y5020
Fluke 742A-1
Resistance Standard
Resistance Standard
Resistance Standard
Current Shunt Adapter
Fluke 742A-10
Fluke 742A-100
Fluke 742A-10M
Fluke 792A-7004
Provides test cables, esp. TC leads
DC volts, resistance
Temperature reference
Source for thermocouple measurements (characterize w/ the DMM, if necessary)
Phase
Capacitance
Frequency
Purpose
ACV and ACI w/ shunts
10 A dc
300 mA dc
30 mA dc
3 mA dc
Resistance at 320 M
Ω
Assures compatibility w/ A40 shunts
ACI AC Shunts Fluke A40 (10 mA, 30 mA, 300 mA,
3 A) and A40A-10
Interconnect cable for A40A Fluke A45-4004
Precision metal film resistors 1 k
Ω
, 1%, 100 ppm/
°
C or better
Cable adapter for A40A
Current shunt for <330
µ
A
(Determine value w/ the DMM)
3-4.
Starting Calibration
From the front panel, you start calibration by pressing the S key, followed by the
CAL softkey twice, then 5500A CAL. The CALIBRATION SWITCH on the 5500A rear panel can be in either position when you begin calibration. It must be set for ENABLE to store the correction factors into nonvolatile memory.
3-5.
How the Calibration Procedure Works
The calibration procedure is self-prompting, with a chance to ABORT and DISCARD any changes after each function is calibrated. After you press the 5500A CAL softkey, the procedure works as follows:
1. The 5500A automatically programs the outputs listed in the following tables and prompts you to make external connections to appropriate measurement instruments.
2. The 5500A then goes into Operate, or asks you to place it into Operate.
3-4
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3. You are then prompted to enter into the 5500A the value read on the measurement instrument.
Note
Intermixed with these "output and measure" procedures are internal 5500A calibration procedures that require no action by the operator.
3-6.
DC Volts
Measure the 5500A output using a precision DMM, and enter into the 5500A each of the measured values listed in Table 3-2 when prompted to do so.
Table 3-2. DC Volts Calibration Steps
Step 5500A Output (NORMAL)
3
3-7.
AC Volts
Measure the 5500A output using a precision ac voltmeter, and enter into the 5500A each of the measured values listed in Table 3-3 when prompted to do so.
Table 3-3. AC Volts Calibration Steps
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
Step
3
4
1
2
5500A Output (NORMAL)
3.2999 V
0.330 V
3.00 V
3.00 V
30 mV
30 mV
300 mV
30 V
30 V
300 V
300 V
1000 V
1000 V
Frequency
100 Hz
100 Hz
500 kHz
9.99 Hz
100 Hz
500 kHz
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 kHz
100 kHz
20 kHz
100 Hz
7 kHz
3-5
5500A
Service Manual
3-8.
Thermocouple Measuring
This procedure calibrates the temperature measuring capability of the 5500A by externally measuring a known temperature. The connections are shown in Figure 3-1.
Mercury
Thermometer
5500 A
5500A CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
LO
20V PK
MAX
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
STBY
7
4
1
OPR EARTH
8
5
9
6
SCOPE
µ
n m k
BOOST dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
2 3 p
M F
+ / 0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
J type
Thermocouple
Mineral Oil
Lag Bath
Dewar Flask and Cap om008f.eps
Figure 3-1. Connections for Calibrating TC Measure
1. Apply a copper short to the TC terminals. Allow the temperature of the short to stabilize for 3 minutes.
2. Perform the "zero" calibration as indicated on the 5500A front panel.
3. Remove the copper short as instructed on the 5500A front panel.
4. Perform the "gain" CAL as follows: Plug a J thermocouple into the TC terminals as
Figure 3-1 shows. Allow the temperature to stabilize for 3 minutes. Measure a lag bath that is within
±
2
°
C of ambient temperature. Compare this reading with a precision temperature standard and enter the reading into the 5500A when prompted to do so.
3-6
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3-9.
DC Current
Use a precision DMM and appropriate precision shunts to measure the 5500A output as
Figure 3-2 shows. Enter into the 5500A each of the measured values listed in Table 3-4 when prompted to do so.
3
5500 A
5500A CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
LO
20V PK
MAX
1V PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
STBY
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
PREV
MENU
7
4
1
8
5
2
0
9
6
3
•
µ
m n k p
M
SHIFT dBm
V
W
A sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
ENTER
F
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
AUX
Output
Terminals
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Current Shunt
HP3458 DCV Function
Figure 3-2. Connections for Calibrating DC Current
(AUX)
Table 3-4. DC Current Calibration Steps
Shunt Value
om009f.eps
4
5
2 A
10 A
Y5020, 0.01
Ω
Y5020, 0.01
Ω
3-7
5500A
Service Manual
3-10.
AC Current
Use a Fluke 5790A or equivalent with the appropriate precision shunts and adapter to measure the 5500A output. Refer to the 5790A Operator Manual for operating instructions and connections. Enter into the 5500A each of the measured values listed in
Table 3-5 when prompted to do so.
Table 3-5. AC Current Calibration Steps
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1
2
3
4
(AUX)
3.2999 mA
0.330 mA
3 mA
3 mA
30 mA
2 A
2 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
30 mA
30 mA
300 mA
300 mA
300 mA
2 A
5 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
5 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1000 Hz
5 kHz
100 Hz
500 Hz
1000 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
5 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
5 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
A40-10mA
1 k
Ω
Metal Film
A40-10mA
A40-10mA
1 k
Ω
Metal Film
1 k
Ω
Metal Film
1 k
Ω
Metal Film
A40-30mA
A40-30mA
A40-30mA
A40-300mA
A40-300mA
A40-300mA
A40-3A
A40-3A
A40-3A
Y5020, 0.01
Ω
Y5020, 0.01
Ω
Y5020, 0.01
Ω
3-11.
AUX DC Volts
Measure the AUX output using a precision DMM. Enter into the 5500A the measured values of each step listed in Table 3-6 when prompted to do so.
Table 3-6. AUX DC Volts Calibration Steps
Step
1
2
NORMAL Output
+300 mV
+3 V
AUX output
+300 mV
+3 V
3-8
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3-12.
AUX AC Volts
Measure the AUX output using a precision AC Voltmeter. Enter into the 5500A the measured values of each step listed in Table 3-7 when prompted to do so.
Table 3-7. AUX AC Volts Calibration Steps
3
Step
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
NORMAL Output
1.1 V
1.1 V
1.1 V
1.1 V
1.1 V
1.1 V
1.1 V
AUX output
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
Frequency
100 Hz
5 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
5 kHz
10 kHz
9.99 Hz
3-13.
Resistance
Use a precision DMM to measure the resistance output. Figure 3-3 shows the four-wire connections. Enter into the 5500A the measured values of each step listed in Table 3-8 when prompted to do so.
5500A CALIBRATOR
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
STBY
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
PREV
MENU
7
4
1
8
5
2
0
9
6
3
•
µ
m n k p
M
SHIFT dBm
V
W
A sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
ENTER
F
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
5500A
HP3458 4W Ohms
Function
Connect the Input leads to the NORMAL output terminals.
Connect the SENSE leads to the AUX terminals.
Figure 3-3. Connections for Calibrating Four-Wire Ohms
om010f.eps
3-9
5500A
Service Manual
Table 3-8. Resistance Calibration Steps
Comments
Ω
four-wire measurement k
Ω
two-wire measurement
3-10
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
Table 3-8. Resistance Calibration Steps (cont.)
Comments
Make a two-wire measurement
[1] Perform this test using the HP 3458A in the 10 M
Ω
range and the Fluke 742A-10M in parallel with the 5500A output. Using exactly 10 M
Ω
, the nominal value displayed on the HP 3458A is
9.66667 M
Ω
. Figure 3-4 shows the connections and the equation you use to calculate actual resistance. Enter the calculated actual resistance, R
UUT
, into the HP 3458A. In the equation, R
3458
is the reading of the HP 3458A, R
742
is the printed value of the 742A-10M, and R
UUT
is the actual 5500A output.
3
5500A
5500A CALIBRATOR
R
UUT
=
( R
3458
R
742
_
( ( R
742
R
3458
(
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
LO
20V PK
MAX
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
STBY
+
7
4
1
/
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
PREV
MENU
8
5
2
0
9
6
3
•
µ
m n k p
M
SHIFT dBm
V
W
A
ENTER
F sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
HP3458 4W Ohms
Function
742A-10M om011f.eps
Figure 3-4. High End Resistance Connections with Equation
3-11
5500A
Service Manual
3-14.
Capacitance
Use the Fluke 6304C LCR Meter with PM9540/BAN output cable as shown in Figure
3-5. This cable eliminates the need for a four-wire connection. Using the PM6304C LCR meter, HI LEVEL is 2 V and NORMAL LEVEL is 1 V. The 5500A is automatically set to
COMP off
. Enter into the 5500A the measured values of each step listed in Table 3-9 when prompted to do so.
Note
Make sure there are no other connections to the 5500A, especially the
SCOPE BNC. Connecting any additional grounds to the 5500A can cause erroneous capacitance outputs.
PM6304C
5500A
5500A CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
LO
20V PK
MAX
1V PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
TC
20V PK
MAX
STBY
+
7
4
1
/
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
PREV
MENU
8
5
2
9
6
3
µ
n m k p
M dBm
V
W
A sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
F
0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
CE
MEAS
TC
TRIG
OUT
MULT x
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O om012f.eps
Figure 3-5. LCR Meter Connections
3-12
Step
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Table 3-9. Capacitance Calibration Steps
5500A Output (NORMAL) Recommended Stimulus
2 V rms at 1 kHz
1 V rms at 1 kHz
1 V rms at 100 Hz
1 V rms at 50 Hz
3-13
5500A
Service Manual
3-15.
Capacitance, Four-Wire Comp
This step measures the internal capacitance between the 5500A AUX HI and NORMAL
LO terminals to give the best COMP four-wire operation in Capacitance.
Refer to Figure 3-6. Connect the LCR meter INPUT/SENSE HI to the 5500A AUX HI; connect the LCR meter INPUT/SENSE LO to the 5500A NORMAL LO. Enter the LCR reading into the 5500A when prompted. The LCR meter should nominally read 400 pF with a 1 kHz, 2 V rms stimulus.
Note
Make sure there are no other connections to the 5500A, especially the
SCOPE BNC. Connecting any additional grounds to the 5500A can cause erroneous capacitance outputs.
PM6304C
5500A CALIBRATOR
Input sense high to AUX high.
5500 A
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
LO
20V PK
MAX
1V PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
TC
20V PK
MAX
STBY
7
4
OPR
8
5
2
EARTH
9
6
SCOPE
µ
n m k
BOOST dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
3 p
M F 1
+
/ 0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
CE
MEAS
TC
TRIG
OUT
MULT x
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Input sense LO to normal LO.
om013f.eps
Figure 3-6. Connections for Four-Wire Compensated Capacitance
Note
The remaining steps in the calibration procedure are not necessary unless the 5500A has been repaired. They are called “Factory Cal,” and are accessible only via the remote interface.
3-16.
Frequency
Frequency calibration is only accessible by remote command. See “Remote Commands for 5500A Calibration,” later in this chapter. In remote, you can jump to Frequency calibration by sending the command:
CAL_START FACTORY
In Frequency calibration, the 5500A outputs 3 V, 500 kHz. Measure the frequency with a precision counter. Enter the frequency reading into the 5500A when prompted by the
5500A.
3-14
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3-17.
NORMAL Volts and AUX Volts Phase
NORMAL volts and AUX volts phase calibration is only accessible by remote command.
See “Remote Commands for 5500A Calibration,” later in this chapter. In remote, you can jump to NORMAL volts and AUX volts phase calibration by sending the command:
CAL_START FACTORY,PHASE
Measure with a phase meter of suitable accuracy as shown in Figure 3-7. Enter into the
5500A the measured values when prompted.
The 5500A outputs the voltages shown in Table 3-10. The 5500A is automatically set to
LOs open.
3
AUX
Output
Terminals
Reference
Terminals
NORMAL
Output
Terminals
5500A CALIBRATOR
5500A
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
LO
20V PK
MAX
1V PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
STBY
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
PREV
MENU
7
4
1
8
5
2
0
9
6
3
•
µ
m n k p
M
SHIFT dBm
V
W
A sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
ENTER
F
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Clark-Hess
Phase Meter
Signal
Terminals om014f.eps
Figure 3-7. Normal Volts and AUX Volts Phase Calibration
Table 3-10. Normal Volts and AUX Volts Phase Calibration Steps
Reference
Step NORMAL Output
1
2
3.00 V
3.00 V
AUX output
300 mV
3.00 V
Signal
Frequency (0
° φ
)
10 kHz
10 kHz
3-18.
Volts and AUX Current Phase
The 5500A outputs the voltages and currents shown in Figure 3-8. The 5500A is automatically set to LOs open. You need to externally connect the NORMAL LO and
AUX LO. To measure the phase, connect a 0.1
Ω
, 1.0 W low-inductive shunt directly across the AUX terminals and sense the voltage there with a phase meter of suitable accuracy. Table 3-11 shows the steps in this procedure. In remote, you can jump to
NORMAL volts and AUX current phase calibration by sending the command:
CAL_START FACTORY,IPHASE
3-15
5500A
Service Manual
5500A CALIBRATOR
5500 A
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
HI
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
20V
RMS
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
STBY
7
4
1
OPR EARTH
8
5
2
9
6
3
SCOPE
µ
n m k p
M
BOOST dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
F
+ / 0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
CE
MEAS
TC
MULT x
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Reference
Terminals
Clark-Hess
Phase Meter
Signal
Terminals
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
LO
20V PK
MAX
1V PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TC
0.1 Ohm shunt placed as closely as possible to the AUX terminals of the 5500A
If the Phase Meter LO terminals are not common use a short between NORMAL LO and AUX LO on the 5500A om015f.eps
Figure 3-8. Volts and Current Phase Calibration
Table 3-11. Volts and Current Phase Calibration Steps
Reference
Step NORMAL Output ( Volts)
Signal
Current Output (Amps)
Frequency (Hz)
(0
°
phase)
3-16
3-19.
Remote Commands for 5500A Calibration
Calibration of the 5500A using remote commands is simple. To access calibration steps described in paragraphs 3-6 through 3-15, simply send the command:
CAL_START MAIN
To access calibration steps described in paragraphs 3-16 through 3-18, send the command:
CAL_START FACTORY
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
To jump to specific calibration steps, these two commands can be modified by specifying an entry point. The allowable entry points are as shown in Table 3-12.
Table 3-12. Jumping to a Specific Calibration Step in Remote
Entry points for CAL_START MAIN
AC Volts
Thermocouple Measuring
DC Current
AC Current
AUX DC Volts
AUX AC Volts
Resistance
Capacitance
Entry points for CAL_START FACTORY
NORMAL Volts and AUX Volts Phase
Volts and Current Phase
Modifier
AV
TEMPX
ICAL
AI
V2
AVS
R
C
Modifier
PHASE
IPHASE
For example, to jump directly to AC Volts calibration, send the command:
CAL_START MAIN,AV
To go directly to Resistance calibration, send the command:
CAL_START MAIN,R
To go directly to Phase calibration, send the command:
CAL_START FACTORY,PHASE
These calibration commands can be used with either the IEEE-488 or serial interface. To use the serial interface, and without having to write a calibration program, do the following:
1. Connect the appropriate COM port from a PC to the 5500A Serial 1 connector, using a Fluke PM8914 cable.
2. Call up the Terminal program from within Microsoft Windows. Set the communications parameters to match that of the 5500A.
3. Press E. At the prompt, type the desired calibration command, e.g.,
CAL_START FACTORY
.
3-17
5500A
Service Manual
3-20.
Generating a Calibration Report
Three different calibration reports are available from the 5500A, each one either formatted for printing, or in comma-separated variable format for importation into a spreadsheet. Using the REPORT SETUP softkey under UTILITY FUNCTS / CAL, you select lines per page, calibration interval , type of report, format, and which serial port to use. The three types of report are as follows:
•
“stored,” which is a comparison of the most recent calibration shifts to those from the previous calibration.
•
“active,” which is a comparison of the active calibration shifts to those from the most recent calibration. (These shifts are all zero unless you have just done a new calibration, but not saved the constants yet.)
•
“consts,” which is a listing of the active set of raw calibration constant values.
The following examples show the first few lines of calibration shifts and calibration constants reports, in both printout and spreadsheet formats. The 90-day specification is shown in these examples because a 90-day interval was selected in the REPORT SETUP menu.
3-21.
Calibration Shifts Report, Printout Format
FLUKE CORPORATION 5500A OUTPUT SHIFTS, ACTIVE VS. STORED 5500A S/N 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Report string =
Cal dates: Active = 0, Stored = 0, Old = 0
------------------------------
DC Voltage (DCV)
------------------------------
RANGE AND VALUE OUTPUT SHIFT 90 DAY SPEC % OF SPEC
DC330MV +329.9999 mV +0.000 uV +0.00000% 0.00591% +0.0%
DC330MV -329.9999 mV +0.000 uV +0.00000% 0.00591% +0.0%
DC3_3V +3.299999 V +0.00000 mV +0.00000% 0.00420% +0.0%
DC3_3V -3.299999 V +0.00000 mV +0.00000% 0.00420% +0.0%
DC33V +32.99999 V +0.0000 mV +0.00000% 0.00400% +0.0%
DC33V -32.99999 V +0.0000 mV +0.00000% 0.00400% +0.0%
DC330V +329.9999 V +0.000 mV +0.00000% (NO SPEC) ----
DC330V +30.0000 V +0.000 mV +0.00000% 0.01000% +0.0%
DC330V -30.0000 V +0.000 mV +0.00000% 0.01000% +0.0%
DC330V -329.9999 V +0.000 mV +0.00000% (NO SPEC) ----
DC1000V +1000.000 V +0.00 mV +0.00000% (NO SPEC) ----
DC1000V +100.000 V +0.00 mV +0.00000% (NO SPEC) ----
DC1000V -100.000 V +0.00 mV +0.00000% (NO SPEC) ----
DC1000V -1000.000 V +0.00 mV +0.00000% (NO SPEC) ----
------------------------------
Secondary DC Voltage (DCV_DCV)
------------------------------
RANGE AND VALUE OUTPUT SHIFT 90 DAY SPEC % OF SPEC
DC330MV_S +329.999 mV +0.00 uV +0.00000% 0.13610% +0.0%
DC330MV_S -329.999 mV +0.00 uV +0.00000% 0.13610% +0.0%
(continued)
3-18
Calibration and Verification
Generating a Calibration Report
3-22.
Calibration Shifts Report, Spreadsheet Format
ACTIVE=,0,STORED=,0,OLD=,0
DC330MV,+329.9999 mV, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00006
DC330MV,-329.9999 mV, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00006
DC3_3V,+3.299999 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00004
DC3_3V,-3.299999 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00004
DC33V,+32.99999 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00004
DC33V,-32.99999 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00004
DC330V,+329.9999 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00000
DC330V,+30.0000 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00010
DC330V,-30.0000 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00010
DC330V,-329.9999 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00000
DC1000V,+1000.000 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00000
DC1000V,+100.000 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00000
DC1000V,-100.000 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00000
DC1000V,-1000.000 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00000
DC330MV_S,+329.999 mV, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00136
DC330MV_S,-329.999 mV, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00136
DC3_3V_S,+3.30000 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00041
DC3_3V_S,-3.30000 V, 0.00 Hz,+0e+00,V,+0.00000,0.00041
(continued)
3-23.
Calibration Constant Report, Printout Format
FLUKE CORPORATION 5500A CALIBRATION CONSTANT VALUES 5500A S/N 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NAME ACTIVE STORED OLD DEFAULT
SL40MV_F8 1.2800001E-01 1.2800001E-01 1.2800001E-01 1.2800001E-01
SL40MV_F9 1.5000001E-01 1.5000001E-01 1.5000001E-01 1.5000001E-01
SL40MV_FA 2.0000000E-01 2.0000000E-01 2.0000000E-01 2.0000000E-01
SL40MV_FB 2.5000000E-01 2.5000000E-01 2.5000000E-01 2.5000000E-01
SL40MV_FC 3.0000001E-01 3.0000001E-01 3.0000001E-01 3.0000001E-01
SL100MV_G 1.4230000E+01 1.4230000E+01 1.4230000E+01 1.4230000E+01
SL100MV_F1 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00
SL100MV_F2 6.5000001E-03 6.5000001E-03 6.5000001E-03 6.5000001E-03
SL100MV_F3 1.6000001E-02 1.6000001E-02 1.6000001E-02 1.6000001E-02
SL100MV_F4 3.7999999E-02 3.7999999E-02 3.7999999E-02 3.7999999E-02
SL100MV_F5 7.5000003E-02 7.5000003E-02 7.5000003E-02 7.5000003E-02
SL100MV_F6 9.7999997E-02 9.7999997E-02 9.7999997E-02 9.7999997E-02
SL100MV_F7 1.1800000E-01 1.1800000E-01 1.1800000E-01 1.1800000E-01
SL100MV_F8 1.2800001E-01 1.2800001E-01 1.2800001E-01 1.2800001E-01
SL100MV_F9 1.5000001E-01 1.5000001E-01 1.5000001E-01 1.5000001E-01
SL100MV_FA 2.0000000E-01 2.0000000E-01 2.0000000E-01 2.0000000E-01
SL100MV_FB 2.5000000E-01 2.5000000E-01 2.5000000E-01 2.5000000E-01
SL100MV_FC 3.0000001E-01 3.0000001E-01 3.0000001E-01 3.0000001E-01
SL400MV_G 5.6669998E+00 5.6669998E+00 5.6669998E+00 5.6669998E+00
SL400MV_F1 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00
SL400MV_F2 6.5000001E-03 6.5000001E-03 6.5000001E-03 6.5000001E-03
(continued)
3
3-19
5500A
Service Manual
3-24.
Calibration Constants Report, Spreadsheet Format
ACTIVE=,0,STORED=,0,OLD=,0
VDAC_Z1, 4.0950000E+03, 4.0950000E+03, 4.0950000E+03, 4.0950000E+03
VDAC_Z2, 6.7770000E+03, 6.7770000E+03, 6.7770000E+03, 4.0960000E+03
VDAC_RATIO, 6.3140000E+03, 6.3140000E+03, 6.3140000E+03, 6.7550000E+03
VDAC_G, 5.8708777E+02, 5.8708777E+02, 5.8708777E+02, 5.8700000E+02
VDAC_N, 5.8709972E+02, 5.8709972E+02, 5.8709972E+02, 5.8700000E+02
IDAC_Z1, 4.0950000E+03, 4.0950000E+03, 4.0950000E+03, 4.0950000E+03
IDAC_Z2, 6.4480000E+03, 6.4480000E+03, 6.4480000E+03, 4.0960000E+03
IDAC_RATIO, 5.9950000E+03, 5.9950000E+03, 5.9950000E+03, 6.7550000E+03
IDAC_G, 5.8719214E+02, 5.8719214E+02, 5.8719214E+02, 5.8700000E+02
IDAC_N, 5.8720334E+02, 5.8720334E+02, 5.8720334E+02, 5.8700000E+02
(continued)
3-25.
Performance Verification Tests
The following tests are used to verify the performance of the 5500A Calibrator. If an outof-tolerance condition is found, the instrument can be re-calibrated using the front panel or the remote interface as described previously in this chapter.
Use the same test equipment and connection methods as used in the preceding calibration procedures.
Zero the 5500A Calibrator before testing by completing “Zeroing the Calibrator” as described next.
The performance tests have reserved columns for recording the Measured Value and
Deviation (%).
3-26.
Zeroing the Calibrator
Zeroing recalibrates internal circuitry, most notably dc offsets in all ranges of operation.
To meet the specifications in Chapter 1, zeroing is required every 7 days, or when the
5500A Calibrator ambient temperature changes by more than 5
°
C. Zeroing is particularly important when your calibration workload has 1 m
Ω
and 1 mV resolution, and when there are significant temperature changes in the 5500A Calibrator work environment.
There are two zeroing functions: total instrument zero (ZERO) and ohms-only zero
(OHMS ZERO).
Complete the following procedure to zero the calibrator. (Note: The 5500A Calibrator rear panel CALIBRATION switch does not have to be enabled for this procedure.)
1. Turn on the Calibrator and allow a warmup period of at least 30 minutes.
2. Press the R key.
3. Install a copper short circuit in the front panel TC connector (total instrument zero only).
4. Press the S key, opening the setup menu.
5. Press the CAL softkey, opening the calibration information menu.
6. Press the CAL softkey.
7. Press the ZERO softkey to totally zero the 5500A Calibrator; press the OHMS ZERO softkey to zero only the ohms function. After the zeroing routine is complete (several minutes), press the R key to reset the calibrator.
3-20
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3-27.
DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)
The DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of dc voltage at the
5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals. Table 3-13 shows the test points.
3
Range Nominal Value Measured Value
(NORMAL)
30 V
300 V
300 V
300 V
300 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
330 mV
330 mV
330 mV
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
30 V
30 V
-32.9 V
50 V
329 V
-50 V
-329 V
334 V
900 V
-334 V
-900 V
0.0000 mV
329 mV
-329 mV
0.000 mV
3.29 V
-3.29 V
0.00 mV
32.9 V
Table 3-13. DC Voltage Accuracy Test
Deviation % 90-Day Spec. (
0.0042%
0.0055%
0.0047%
0.0055%
0.0047%
0.0049%
0.0047%
0.0049%
0.0047%
3.0
µ
V
0.0059%
0.0059%
5
µ
V
0.0042%
0.0042%
50
µ
V
0.0042%
µ
V or %)
3-28.
DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (AUX)
The DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of dc voltage at the
5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals in the presence of a lower voltage at the
NORMAL terminals. Table 3-14 shows the test points.
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
Nominal Value
(NORMAL)
3 V
3 V
Nominal Value
(AUX)
0 mV
329 mV
-329 mV
0.33 V
3.29 V
-3.29 V
Table 3-14. DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Test
Deviation % Measured Value (V)
(AUX)
90-Day Spec.
(% or mV)
0.350 mV
0.1365%
0.1365%
0.1361%
0.0407%
0.0407%
3-21
5500A
Service Manual
33 mA
33 mA
33 mA
33 mA
330 mA
330 mA
330 mA
330 mA
330 mA
2.2 A
2.2 A
2.2 A
11 A
11 A
11 A
3.3 mA
3.3 mA
3.3 mA
3.3 mA
3.3 mA
3.3 mA
3.3 mA
33 mA
3-29.
DC Current Amplitude Accuracy
The DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of dc current at the
5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals. See Figure 3-2 and Table 3-4 for test equipment connection instructions. Table 3-15 shows the test points.
Range Nominal
Value
19 mA
-19 mA
32.9 mA
-32.9 mA
0 mA
190 mA
-190 mA
329 mA
-329 mA
0 A
2.19 A
-2.19 A
0 A
11 A
-11 A
0 mA
0.19 mA
-0.19 mA
1.9 mA
-1.9 mA
3.29 mA
-3.29 mA
0 mA
Table 3-15. DC Current Amplitude Accuracy Test
Measured Value (A)
(AUX)
Deviation % 90-Day Spec.
(% or mA)
0.00005 mA
0.036%
0.036%
0.013%
0.013%
0.012%
0.012%
0.00025 mA
0.009%
0.009%
0.009%
0.009%
0.0033 mA
0.010%
0.010%
0.009%
0.009%
0.000044 A
0.025%
0.025%
0.00033 A
0.041%
0.041%
3-22
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3-30.
Resistance Accuracy
The Resistance Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of synthesized resistance at the 5500A
Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals. See Figure 3-3 for test equipment connection instructions. For resistances of less than 110 k
Ω
, use the four-wire COMP option. For resistances of 110 k
Ω
or higher, the COMP option is automatically turned off. Table 3-16 shows the test points.
3
Nominal Value
Table 3-16. Resistance Accuracy Test
Measured Value (Ohms)
0
Ω
2
Ω
10.9
Ω
11.9
Ω
19
Ω
30
Ω
33
Ω
109
Ω
119
Ω
190
Ω
300
Ω
330
Ω
1.09 k
Ω
1.19 k
Ω
1.9 k
Ω
3 k
Ω
3.3 k
Ω
10.9 k
Ω
11.9 k
Ω
19 k
Ω
30 k
Ω
33 k
Ω
109 k
Ω
119 k
Ω
190 k
Ω
Deviation % 90-Day Spec. (m
Ω
or %)
0.309%
0.064%
0.135%
0.088%
0.059%
0.052%
0.021%
0.020%
0.015%
0.012%
0.025%
0.012%
0.012%
0.010%
0.009%
0.025%
0.012%
0.012%
0.010%
0.009%
0.026%
0.013%
0.014%
0.012%
3-23
5500A
Service Manual
Table 3-16. Resistance Accuracy Test (cont.)
Nominal Value Measured Value (Ohms) Deviation % 90-Day Spec. (m
Ω
or %)
300 k
Ω
330 k
Ω
1.09 M
Ω
1.19 M
Ω
1.9 M
Ω
3 M
Ω
3.3 M
Ω
10.9 M
Ω
11.9 M
Ω
19 M
Ω
30 M
Ω
33 M
Ω
109 M
Ω
119 M
Ω
0.011%
0.028%
0.016%
0.016%
0.014%
0.013%
0.062%
0.050%
0.080%
0.078%
0.077%
0.415%
0.406%
0.413%
290 M
Ω
[1] 0.403%
[1] Perform this test using the HP 3458A in the 10 M
Ω
range and the Fluke 742A-10M in parallel with the 5500A output. Using exactly 10 M
Ω
, the nominal value is 9.66667 M
Ω
. Figure 3-4 shows the connections and the equation you use to calculate actual resistance.
3-31.
Resistance DC Offset Measurement
The Resistance DC Offset Measurement test checks the dc offset of the amplifiers used in synthesizing resistance. Prior to performing this test, make sure you zero the 5500A
Calibrator following the “Zeroing the Calibrator” procedure described earlier in this chapter. Set the output to 100 ohms, COMP OFF, and measure the NORMAL terminals with a dc millivoltmeter. Table 3-17 shows the test point.
100
Ω
Range
Table 3-17. Resistance DC Offset Measurement Test
Nominal Value
0.000 mV
Measured Value (V)
(NORMAL)
Deviation % 8-Hour Spec.
mV
3-24
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3-32.
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)
The AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of ac voltage at the
5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals. Table 3-18 shows the test points.
3
Nominal Value
Table 3-18. AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Test (NORMAL)
Frequency Deviation % 90-Day Spec. (%) Measured Value
(V)
(NORMAL)
30 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
3 V
30 mV
30 mV
30 mV
30 mV
30 mV
30 mV
30 mV
30 mV
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
450 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
500 kHz
9.5 Hz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
450 kHz
0.950
5.550
0.207
0.047
0.047
0.047
0.087
0.133
0.227
0.640
5.550
5.550
0.327
0.177
0.177
0.177
0.217
0.257
0.370
0.118
0.022
0.022
0.022
0.062
0.110
0.227
0.490
3-25
5500A
Service Manual
Table 3-18. AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Test (NORMAL) (cont.)
Nominal Value Frequency Deviation % 90-Day Spec. (%) Measured Value
(V)
(NORMAL)
300 V
300 V
300 V
300 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
30 V
30 V
30 V
30 V
30 V
30 V
30 V
30 V
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
50 kHz
90 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
18 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
8 kHz (10 kHz optional)
5.550
0.118
0.032
0.032
0.032
0.069
0.157
0.227
0.042
0.042
0.065
0.081
0.048
0.048
0.160
0.200
3-26
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3-33.
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (AUX)
The AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of ac voltage at the
5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals in the presence of a voltage at the
NORMAL terminals. Leave the NORMAL terminals disconnected. Table 3-19 shows the test points.
3
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
1000 V
1000 V
500 V
250 V
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
Nominal Value
(NORMAL)
Table 3-19. AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Test (AUX)
Nominal Value
(AUX)
Frequency Measured
Value
(V) (AUX)
Deviation
%
300 mV
300 mV
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
10 mV
100 mV
100 mV
1 V
10 mV
10 mV
10 mV
10 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
5 kHz
10 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
90-Day Spec.
0.197
0.347
3.780
0.450
0.600
0.440
0.300
0.450
5.550
0.165
0.085
0.085
3.780%
3.780
4.650
4.800
5.550
0.273
0.203
0.203
(%)
3-27
5500A
Service Manual
3-34.
AC Current Amplitude Accuracy
The AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of ac current at the
5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals. Use a Fluke 5790A with the appropriate precision shunts and adapter to measure the 5500A output. Refer to the 5790A Operator
Manual for operating instructions and connections. See Figure 3-2 for connections, and see Table 3-5 for shunt information. Table 3-20 shows the test points.
3.29 mA
3.29 mA
3.29 mA
3.29 mA
3.29 mA
3.3 mA
3.3 mA
19 mA
19 mA
32.9 mA
32.9 mA
32.9 mA
Table 3-20. AC Current Amplitude Accuracy Test
Nominal Value Frequency
33
µ
A 1
33
µ
A 10
190
µ
A 45
190
µ
A 1
190
µ
A 10
329
µ
A 10
329
µ
A 45
329
µ
A 1
329
µ
A 5
329
µ
A 10
Measured Value
(A)
(AUX)
0.33 mA
0.33 mA
1.9 mA
1.9 mA
1 kHz
5 kHz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
Deviation % 90-Day Spec. (%)
0.848%
1.395
0.169
0.222
1.019
0.236
0.136
0.166
0.346
0.986
0.171
0.241
0.096
0.466
0.159
0.089
0.089
0.159
0.459
0.161
0.241
0.086
0.466
0.159
0.079
0.079
3-28
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
2.19 A
2.19 A
2.2 A
2.2 A
11 A
11 A
329 mA
329 mA
329 mA
0.33 A
0.33 A
2.19 A
11 A
32.9 mA
32.9 mA
33 mA
33 mA
190 mA
190 mA
329 mA
329 mA
Nominal Value
Table 3-20. AC Current Amplitude Accuracy Test (cont.)
Frequency Deviation % 90-Day Spec. (%) Measured Value
(A)
(AUX)
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
500 Hz
1 kHz
45 Hz
500 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
45 Hz
0.094
0.714
0.171
0.471
0.068
0.098
0.080
0.159%
0.459
0.171
0.791
0.094
0.268
0.159
0.459
0.161
0.241
0.086
0.466
0.159
0.080
3
3-35.
Capacitance Accuracy
The Capacitance Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of the synthesized capacitance output at the 5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals. Table 3-21 shows the test points. Use the Fluke 6304C LCR Meter with PM9540/BAN output cable as shown in
Figure 3-5. This cable eliminates the need for a four-wire connection.
Note
Make sure there are no other connections to the 5500A, especially the
SCOPE BNC. Connecting any additional grounds to the 5500A can cause erroneous capacitance outputs. To overcome a noise problem, increase the meter’s signal current by increasing the voltage or frequency.
3-29
5500A
Service Manual
Table 3-21. Capacitance Accuracy Test
Nominal Value LCR Stimulus
Frequency
Measured
Value (F)
(NORMAL)
Deviation
%
90-Day Spec.
(%)
0.35
η
F 1
0.48
η
F 1
0.6
η
F 1
1
η
F 1
1.2
η
F 1
3
η
F 1
3.3
η
F 1
10.9
η
F 1
3.23%
2.46
2.05
1.38
1.22
0.71
0.68
0.47
12
η
F 1
30
η
F 1
33
η
F 1
109
η
F 1
120
η
F 1
300
η
F 1
1.03
0.52
0.49
0.28
0.44
0.29
330
η
F 100
1.09
µ
F 100
1.2
µ
F 100 0.51
3
µ
F 100 0.36
3.3
µ
F 100
10.9
µ
F 100
0.49
0.28
0.56
0.35
12
µ
F 100
30
µ
F 100
33
µ
F 100
109
µ
F 100
120
µ
F 100
300
µ
F 100
330
µ
F 50
0.55
0.40
0.68
0.47
0.75
0.60
1.09
1.1 mF 50 Hz 1.03
3-30
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3-36.
Thermocouple Measurement Accuracy
The Thermocouple Measurement Accuracy test checks the internal temperature reference.
To perform this test, measure a lag bath temperature within + 2
°
C of the 5500A. Set the
5500A to Internal Reference, J thermocouple type. Make connections with J-type thermocouple wire as shown in Figure 3-1. Table 3-22 shows the test points.
3
Nominal Value (
°
C)
Lag bath temperature
Table 3-22. Thermocouple Measurement Accuracy Test
5500A Reads (
°
C) Deviation
°
C 90-Day Spec. (
°
C)
0.1
3-37.
Thermocouple Sourcing Accuracy
The Thermocouple Sourcing Accuracy test checks the accuracy of the thermocouple measuring circuitry. For this test, measure the dc output at the 5500A front panel TC connector with a dc meter (observe polarity on the TC connector). Select External
Reference and the linear output 10
µ
V/
°
C as the thermocouple “type.” Use all copper wires for these connections. The Fluke 5500A/Leads test lead kit contains a copper TC plug and wire for this purpose. Table 3-23 shows the test points.
Table 3-23. Thermocouple Sourcing Accuracy Test
Nominal Value (
°
C) Equivalent Value
(mV)
Measured Value
(mV)
(TC connector)
0 0.000 mV
100 1.000
-100 -1.000
1000 10.000
-1000 -10.000
10000 100.000
-10000 -100.000
Deviation
%
90-Day Spec.
(mV or %)
0.003 mV
0.305%
0.305%
0.035%
0.035%
0.008%
0.008%
3-38.
Thermocouple Measuring Accuracy
The Thermocouple Measuring Accuracy test checks the accuracy of the thermocouple measuring circuitry. For this test, input a dc voltage into the 5500A front panel TC terminals using copper plugs and wire (observe polarity on the TC connector), select
External Reference, and select the linear output 10
µ
V/
°
C as the thermocouple “type.”
The Fluke 5500A/Leads test lead kit contains a copper TC plug and wire for this purpose.
Table 3-24 shows the test points.
(Optional: You can also source a known temperature from a temperature calibrator using a J-type thermocouple connection and Internal Reference. Source 0
°
C, 100
°
C, 1000
°
C, and -200
°
C.)
3-31
5500A
Service Manual
Table 3-24. Thermocouple Measuring Accuracy Test
Input Value Nominal Reading
(
°
C)
Actual Reading
(mV) (TC connector)
Deviation %
0 V
100 mV
-100 mV
0.00
10,000.00
-10,000.00
90-Day Spec.
(mV or %)
0.003 mV
0.008%
0.008%
3-39.
DC Power Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)
The DC Power Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL) test checks the amplitude accuracy of the dc volts at the NORMAL terminals in the presence of DC I at the AUX terminals.
Apply a short to the AUX terminals to provide a low-impedance path for current. Table
3-25 shows the test points.
Table 3-25. DC Power Amplitude Accuracy Test (NORMAL)
Nominal Value
(NORMAL)
20 mV
20 mV
Nominal Value
(A)
(AUX)
2.19 A
11 A
Measured Value (V)
(NORMAL)
Deviation % 90-Day Spec. (%)
0.020%
0.020%
3-40.
DC Power Amplitude Accuracy (AUX)
The DC Power Amplitude Accuracy (AUX) test checks the amplitude accuracy of the dc current output at the AUX terminals in the presence of dc voltage at the NORMAL terminals. Use the connections shown in Figure 3-2. Table 3-26 shows the test points.
Table 3-26. DC Power Amplitude Accuracy Test (AUX)
Nominal Value
(NORMAL)
1000 V
1000 V
329 V
1000 V
Nominal Value
(AUX)
Measured Value (A)
(AUX)
100
µ
A
1 mA
2.19 A
11 A
Deviation % 90-Day Spec. (%)
0.06%
0.015
0.025
0.041
3-32
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3-41.
AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Voltage)
The AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Voltage) test checks the current outputs at the
AUX terminals in the presence of a high voltage. Use the 5790A, A40 and A40A shunts, and the shunt adapter, as described in the 5790A Operator Manual. Table 3-27 shows the test points.
3
Table 3-27. AC Power Amplitude Accuracy Test (High Voltage)
Nominal
Value
(NORMAL)
Nominal
Value
(AUX)
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
3.3 mA
3.3 mA
33 mA
33 mA
33 mA
33 mA
33 mA
(Optional)
800 V
33 mA
Frequency
65 Hz
65 Hz
500 Hz
500 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
7 kHz (10 kHz optional)
10 kHz
Phase
(degrees)
Measured
Value (A)
(AUX)
Deviation % 90-Day
Spec. (%)
0
90
0.161%
0.161
0
0
0
90
0.161
0.161
0.161
0.241
0 0.541
0.541
3-42.
AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Current)
The AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Current) test checks the voltage outputs at the
NORMAL terminals in the presence of a high current. Apply a short to the AUX terminals to provide a low-impedance path for current. Table 3-28 shows the test points.
Table 3-28. AC Power Amplitude Accuracy Test (High Current)
Nominal
Value
(NORMAL)
Nominal
Value
(AUX)
33 mV
33 mV
330 mV
3.3 V
3.3 V
Frequency
11 A
11 A
11 A
65 Hz
65 Hz
1 kHz
2.19 A 5 kHz
329 mA 10 kHz
Phase
(degrees)
0
0
0
90
0
Measured
Value (V)
(NORMAL)
Deviation % 90-Day Spec.
(%)
0.101%
0.101
0.038
0.048
0.048
3-33
5500A
Service Manual
3-43.
AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Power)
The AC Power Amplitude Accuracy (High Power) test checks the accuracy of the ac power output at high power levels. Apply a short to the AUX terminals to provide a lowimpedance path for current. Table 3-29 shows the test points.
Table 3-29. AC Power Amplitude Accuracy Test (High Power)
Nominal
Value
(NORMAL)
Nominal
Value
(AUX)
329 V
1 kV
2.19 A
11 A
Frequency
5 kHz
1 kHz
0
0
Phase
(degrees)
Measured
Value (V)
(NORMAL)
Deviation % 90-Day Spec.
(%)
0.065%
0.048
3-44.
Phase and Frequency Accuracy
The Phase and Frequency Accuracy test checks the accuracy of the phase between signals at the NORMAL output and the AUX inputs, and the accuracy of the frequency. For the volts-volts phase test, ac couple the input to the phase meter as shown in Figure 3-7. For the volts-current phase, measure the phase across a noninductive resistor as shown in
Figure 3-8. Table 3-30 shows the test points for phase. Table 3-31 shows the test points for frequency.
Table 3-30. Phase Accuracy Test
Deviation % 1-Year Spec.
(degrees)
Output
Voltage
(NORMAL)
Output
Voltage
(AUX)
Frequency Nominal
Phase
(degrees)
Measured
Value
(degrees)
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
1 V
60 Hz
400 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
60 Hz
400 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
60 Hz
400 Hz
0
60
60
60
60
0
0
0
0
60
90
90
2
6
0.15 degrees
0.9
10
0.15
0.9
2
6
10
0.15
0.9
3-34
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
Table 3-30. Phase Accuracy Test (cont.)
Output
Voltage
(NORMAL)
3 V
3 V
3 V
Output
Voltage
(AUX)
1 V
1 V
1 V
Frequency Nominal
Phase
(degrees)
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
90
90
90
Measured
Value
(degrees)
Output
Voltage
(NORMAL)
33 V
33 V
33 V
33 V
Output
Current
(AUX)
Frequency Nominal
300 mA 65 Hz
2 A 65 Hz
5 A
5 A
65 Hz
400 Hz
0
0
0
0
Phase
(degrees)
Measured
Value
(degrees)
Deviation % 1-Year Spec.
(degrees)
2
6
10
Deviation % 1-Year Spec.
(degrees)
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.9
3
Table 3-31. Frequency Accuracy Test
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
Output
Voltage
(NORMAL)
119.00 Hz
120.0 Hz
1000.0 Hz
100.00 kHz
(Hz)
42
42
27
25
1-Year Spec.
(ppm)
3-35
5500A
Service Manual
3-45.
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (NORMAL)
The AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (NORMAL) test checks the amplitude accuracy at the NORMAL terminals. For this test, use the Fluke 5790A. Refer to the 5790A Operator Manual for operating instructions and connections. For squarewaves, the measured value (in rms) should be exactly 1/2 the nominal value in peak-to-peak. Table 3-32 shows the test points.
Table 3-32. AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (NORMAL)
Nominal Value (p-p) Frequency
30 mV (15 mV rms)
30 mV
30 mV
30 mV
300 mV (150 mV rms)
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
3 V (1.5 V rms)
3 V
3 V
3 V
30 V (15 V rms)
30 V
30 V
30 V
10 Hz
1 kHz
20 kHz
100 kHz
10 Hz
1 kHz
20 kHz
100 kHz
10 Hz
1 kHz
20 kHz
100 kHz
10 Hz
1 kHz
20 kHz
100 kHz
Measured Value
(V rms) (NORMAL)
Deviation
%
1-Year Spec.
(%)
1.350
0.800
1.050
6.100
1.350
0.800
1.050
6.100
1.350
0.800
1.050
6.100
1.350
0.800
1.050
6.100
3-36
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3-46.
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (AUX)
The AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (AUX) test checks the amplitude accuracy at the AUX terminals. For this test, use the Fluke 5790A. Refer to the 5790A
Operator Manual for operating instructions and connections. For squarewaves, the measured value (in rms) should be exactly 1/2 the nominal value in peak-to-peak. Table
3-33 shows the test points.
3
Nominal Value
(p-p, NORMAL)
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
Table 3-33. AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy, Squarewave (AUX)
Nominal Value
(p-p, AUX)
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
Frequency Measured Value
(V rms, AUX)
10 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
Deviation % 1-Year Spec.
(%)
1.350
0.800
6.100
6.100
1.350
0.800
6.100
6.100
3-37
5500A
Service Manual
3-47.
AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)
The AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL) tests the accuracy of the harmonics from the NORMAL terminals. For this test, set the 5500A output to sinewave.
Table 3-34 shows the test points.
Table 3-34. AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL)
Nominal
Value
(NORMAL)
Nominal
Value
(AUX)
3 V
30 V
30 V
30 V
300 V
300 V
300 V
1000 V
1000 V
800 V
Optional:
1000 V
30 mV
30 mV
30 mV
300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
3 V
3 V
Frequency
(AUX)
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
3 V
300 mV 20 Hz
300 mV 100 Hz
300 mV 200 Hz
300 mV 20 Hz
300 mV 100 Hz
300 mV 200 Hz
3 V
3 V
20 Hz
100 Hz
200 Hz
20 Hz
100 Hz
200 Hz
50 Hz
100 Hz
200 Hz
50 Hz
100 Hz
200 Hz
200 Hz
50th
50th
50th
50th
20th
50th
50th
20th
50th
50th
50th
50th
50th
50th
50th
50th
50th
50th
50th
Harmonic
(NORMAL)
10 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
Frequency
(NORMAL)
Measured
Value (V)
(NORMAL)
Deviat ion %
90-Day
Spec.
(%)
0.024
0.034
0.034
0.034
0.044
0.070
0.070
0.056
0.170
0.275
0.250
0.243%
0.243
0.243
0.053
0.053
0.053
0.024
0.024
3-38
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3-48.
AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (AUX)
The AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (AUX) tests the accuracy of the 50th harmonic from the AUX terminals. For this test, set the 5500A output to sinewave. Table
3-35 shows the test points.
3
Table 3-35. AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy (AUX)
Nominal
Value
(NORMAL)
Nominal
Value
(AUX)
100 mV
100 mV
100 mV
100 mV
100 mV
100 mV
Frequency
(AUX)
329 mV 1 kHz
329 mV 5 kHz
329 mV 10 kHz
3.29 V 1 kHz
3.29 V
3.29 V
5 kHz
10 kHz
20 Hz
100 Hz
200 Hz
20 Hz
100 Hz
200 Hz
Frequency
(NORMAL)
Measured
Value (V)
(AUX)
Deviation
%
90-Day Spec
(%)
0.305%
0.424
0.574
0.097
0.235
0.385
3-49.
DC Voltage Offset Accuracy
The DC Voltage Offset Accuracy test the accuracy of the dc offset function for an ac sinewave output on the NORMAL terminals. Table 3-36 shows the test points.
Nominal
ACV
Value
10 mV
10 mV
100 mV
100 mV
1 V
1 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
Nominal DC
Value
0 V
50 mV
0 V
500 mV
0 V
5 V
0 V
45 V
Table 3-36. DC Voltage Offset Accuracy Test
Frequency
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
Measured Value
(V DC) (NORMAL)
Deviation
%
1-Year Spec.
(
µ
V or %)
33
µ
V
0.166%
330
µ
V
0.166%
3.3 mV
0.166%
33 mV
0.173%
3-39
5500A
Service Manual
3-50.
AC Voltage Accuracy with a DC Offset
The AC Voltage Accuracy with a DC Offset tests the accuracy of the ac output in the presence of a dc offset. For this test, be sure to ac couple the input to the meter. Table
3-37 shows the test points.
Table 3-37. AC Voltage Accuracy with a DC Offset
Nominal DC
Value
Frequency Measured
(V AC) (NORMAL)
Deviation
%
90-Day Spec.
(%)
Nominal
ACV
Value
3.3 mV
33 mV
330 mV
3.3 V
50 mV
500 mV
5 V
45 V
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
0.716%
0.101
0.038
0.048
3-40
static awareness
A Message From
Fluke Corporation
Some semiconductors and custom IC's can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during handling. This notice explains how you can minimize the chances of destroying such devices by:
1. Knowing that there is a problem.
2. Lea r ning the guidelines for handling them.
3. Using the procedures, packaging, and
bench techniques that are recommended.
The following practices should be followed to minimize damage to S.S. (static sensitive) devices.
1. MINIMIZE HANDLING
3. DISCHARGE PERSONAL STATIC BEFORE
HANDLING DEVICES. USE A HIGH RESIS-
TANCE GROUNDING WRIST STRAP.
2. KEEP PARTS IN ORIGINAL CONTAINERS
UNTIL READY FOR USE.
4. HANDLE S.S. DEVICES BY THE BODY.
5. USE STATIC SHIELDING CONTAINERS FOR
HANDLING AND TRANSPORT.
8. WHEN REMOVING PLUG-IN ASSEMBLIES
HANDLE ONLY BY NON-CONDUCTIVE
EDGES AND NEVER TOUCH OPEN EDGE
CONNECTOR EXCEPT AT STATIC-FREE
WORK STATION. PLACING SHORTING
STRIPS ON EDGE CONNECTOR HELPS
PROTECT INSTALLED S.S. DEVICES.
6. DO NOT SLIDE S.S. DEVICES OVER
ANY SURFACE.
7. AVOID PLASTIC,VINYL AND STYROFOAM
IN WORK AREA.
PORTIONS REPRINTED
WITH PERMISSION FROM TEKTRONIX INC.
AND GERNER DYNAMICS, POMONA DIV.
Dow Chemical
9. HANDLE S.S. DEVICES ONLY AT A
STATIC-FREE WORK STATION.
10. ONLY ANTI-STATIC TYPE SOLDER-
SUCKERS SHOULD BE USED.
11. ONLY GROUNDED-TIP SOLDERING
IRONS SHOULD BE USED.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
4-2. Access
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
Removing Analog Modules.............................................................. 4-3
4-7.
4-8.
Removing the Main CPU (A9)......................................................... 4-3
Removing Rear Panel Assemblies.................................................... 4-4
Removing the Filter PCA (A12)....................................................... 4-4
Removing the Encoder (A2) and Display PCAs .............................. 4-4
Removing the Keyboard and Accessing the Output Block .............. 4-4
4-9. Diagnostic
4-11.
4-12.
4-13.
Testing ................................................................................
4-10. Running
Sequence of Diagnostics Tests..................................................... 4-7
Diagnostics Error Messages......................................................... 4-7
Testing the Front Panel..................................................................... 4-13
4-15. Complete List of Error Messages ......................................................... 4-14
4-1
5500A
Service Manual
4-2
Maintenance
Introduction
4
4-1.
Introduction
Because this is a high performance instrument, it is not recommended that the user service the boards to the component level. In many different ways it is easy to introduce a subtle long-term stability problem by handling the boards. Access procedures are provided for those who want to replace a faulty module.
4-2.
Access Procedures
Use the following procedures to remove the following assemblies:
•
Analog modules.
•
Main CPU (A9).
•
Rear Panel Module (transformer and ac line input components).
•
Filter PCA (A12).
•
Encoder (A2) and display assemblies.
•
Keyboard PCA, and thermocouple I/O pca.
4-3.
Removing Analog Modules
Proceed as follows to remove the Voltage (A8), Current (A7), DDS (A6), or Synthesized
Impedance (A5) modules:
1. Remove the eight Phillips screws from the top cover.
2. Remove the top cover.
3. Remove the eight Phillips screws from the guard box cover. The locations of the analog modules are printed on the guard box cover.
4. Lift off the guard box cover using the finger pull on the rear edge of the cover.
5. On the desired analog module, release the board edge locking ears.
6. Lift the board out of its socket in the Motherboard. Lay the board shield side down.
7. To remove the shield, remove Phillips screw at the center of the shield, then pull the sides of the shield away from the board.
8. To reinstall the shield, first align one set of tabs then press the other side into place.
4-4.
Removing the Main CPU (A9)
You can remove the Main CPU (A9) without removing the rear panel or Filter PCA
(A12). Proceed as follows to remove the Main CPU PCA:
1. Remove the 3/16
”
jack screws from the SERIAL 1, SERIAL 2, and BOOST
AMPLIFIER connectors.
2. Remove the 1/4
”
jack screws from the IEEE-488 connector.
3. Remove the three Phillips screws from the right side of the rear panel.
4. Remove the ribbon cable from the Main CPU PCA (A9). There is not much room, but the cable is reachable.
5. Lift out the Main CPU PCA.
4-3
5500A
Service Manual
4-5.
Removing Rear Panel Assemblies
Proceed as follows to remove the transformer and the ac line input filter. Figure 4-1 shows an exploded view of the rear panel assemblies.
1. Remove the two rear handles by removing the six Allen screws from the handles.
2. Remove the eight Phillips screws from the bottom cover.
3. Remove the bottom cover.
4. Remove the three Phillips screws that are accessible through holes in the bottom flange.
5. Remove the power switch pushrod.
6. Remove the rear panel. There are three large cables, plus one for fan power. This assumes that you have already removed the Main CPU (A9). If the Main CPU is still installed, there will be one more cable.
4-6.
Removing the Filter PCA (A12)
Proceed as follows to remove the Filter PCA (A12):
1. Remove the top cover and guard box cover as described under “Removing Analog
Modules.”
2. Remove all the analog modules.
3. Remove the five Phillips screws from the front side of the rear guard box wall.
4. Lift out the Filter PCA.
4-7.
Removing the Encoder (A2) and Display PCAs
Proceed as follows to remove the Encoder PCA (A2) and display pca’s. Figure 4-2 shows an exploded view of the front panel assemblies.
1. Remove top and bottom covers.
2. With the bottom side up, unplug all the cables going to the front panel. One of these cables is fastened by a cable tie that must be cut, then replaced with a new one when reassembling.
3. Remove the two front handles by removing the six Allen screws from the handles.
4. Remove the front panel. The Encoder PCA (A2) and display pca’s are now accessible.
4-8.
Removing the Keyboard and Accessing the Output Block
To remove the keyboard and access the output block, proceed as follows:
1. Do all four steps of the previous procedure.
2. Unlatch the plastic catches that fasten the front panel together.
3. Remove the four Phillips screws that are around the output block.
4. Remove the output cables.
5. Separate the two main parts of the front panel.
4-4
Maintenance
Access Procedures
4 om016f.eps
Figure 4-1. Exploded View of Rear Panel Assemblies
4-5
5500A
Service Manual
4-6
Figure 4-2. Exploded View of Front Panel Assemblies
om017f.eps
Maintenance
Diagnostic Testing
4
4-9.
Diagnostic Testing
5500A internal software provides extensive self-testing capabilities. In case of a malfunction, this is an excellent place to begin testing to isolate a faulty module.
Note
Self-tests should only be run after the 5500A has completed its warm-up.
Access the diagnostics menu as follows:
Press S followed by UTILITY FUNCTNS, and SELF TEST. The menu presents the following choices:
•
PSEUDO CAL -- Runs all the internal gains calibration steps, but does not save the updated constants. This is useful to check for error messages.
•
DIAG -- Runs internal diagnostics.
•
FRONT PANEL -- Allows you to test the front panel knob, keys, bell, and displays.
•
SERIAL IF TEST -- Does a loopback test between the two serial ports. For this test, you attach a straight-through serial cable between the two serial ports. At least pins 2,
3, and 5 need to be connected.
•
DIGITAL TEST -- Checks the RAM and bus on the Main CPU (A9).
4-10.
Running Diagnostics
Press S followed by UTILITY FUNCTNS, SELF TEST, and DIAG. The menu presents the following choices: OPTIONS and GO ON. Press GO ON to start diagnostics.
The 5500A prompts you to remove all cables from the front panel outputs.
4-11.
Sequence of Diagnostics Tests
After you press the GO NO softkey, an automatic sequence of tests begins. Diagnostics runs the following tests:
•
General and DDS assembly (A6) diagnostics (23 steps)
•
Current assembly (A7) diagnostics (24 steps)
•
Synthesized Impedance assembly (A5) diagnostics (26 steps)
•
Voltage assembly (A8) diagnostics (16 steps)
4-12.
Diagnostics Error Messages
If an error message appears during diagnostics, check the following annotated list to determine which assembly, and what circuit, is suspect. You should perform the diagnositics in proper sequence. Each diagnostic test builds on the successful pass of the previous diagnostic test in order to properly diagnose a faulty subcircuit. The assembly named in the error message is almost always the assembly that has the fault.
1006 (DDE:FR ) A6 DCI loop fault
Suspects include U57, U31, and U33 on the A6 assembly.
1007 (DDE:FR ) A6 ACI loop fault
Suspects include U3, U14, U34, U37, U38, U44, U47, U84, and U90 on the A6 assembly.
4-7
5500A
Service Manual
1010 (DDE:FR ) A6 ACV loop fault
Assuming the dc voltage tests pass, there are a number of A6 ICs associated with ac voltage that could be suspect. These include U5, U55, U61, U62, U13, U4, U35, U32,
U49, U25, U96, U40, U20, U39, U84 and U3.
1011 (DDE:FR ) A6 33 mV divider fault
Suspects on the A6 assembly are resistor network Z8 and relay K7.
1012 (DDE:FR ) A6 330 mV DC fault
Suspects on the A6 assembly are resistor network Z8 and relay K7.
1013 (DDE:FR ) A6 +3.3V DC fault
Suspect ICs on the A6 assembly are U21, U57, U15, U60, U87, U48, and U42. These ICs are tested in previous test near 0 V. This test exposes failures at full scale positive.
1014 (DDE:FR ) A6 -3.3V DC fault
Suspect ICs on the A6 assembly are U21, U57, U15, U60, U87, U48 and U42. These ICs are tested in previous test near 0 V. This test exposes failures at full scale negative.
1015 (DDE:FR ) A8 33V DC fault
Suspect components on the A8 assembly include U1, Q1 through Q4, Q6, Q16, Q17,
R10, R13, and R17 through R19.
1016 (DDE:FR ) A6 33 mV AC fault
Suspects include U41, U57, U21, and Z8 on the A6 assembly.
1017 (DDE:FR ) A6 330 mV AC fault
Suspects include U41, U57, U21, and Z8 on the A6 assembly.
1018 (DDE:FR ) A6 3.3V AC fault
Assuming the ACV LOOP test passes, suspect ICs include U41, U57, U21, and U87.
1019 (DDE:FR ) A8 33V AC fault
Suspect components on the A8 assembly include U1, Q1 through Q4, Q6, Q16, Q17,
R10, R13, and R17 through R19.
1020 (DDE:FR ) A6 vloop error amp fault
The primary suspect IC is U60. Other possible suspects include U15 and U48, all on the
A6 assembly.
1021 (DDE:FR ) A6 3.3V amp fault
The primary suspect IC is U42. Another suspect is U48, both on the A6 assembly.
1022 (DDE:FR ) A6 polarity inverter fault
The primary suspect IC is U87 on the A6 assembly.
4-8
Maintenance
Diagnostic Testing
4
1023 (DDE:FR ) A6 3.3V sense buffer fault
Suspect ICs are U21, U57, and U26 on the A6 assembly. If one of these Ics is bad, it will cause faults on the other A6 sense buffer tests as well. Other suspects on the A6 assembly include relay K3 and resistor network Z5.
1024 (DDE:FR ) A6 33V sense buffer fault
Assuming the A6 sense buffer (3.3 V) test passed, suspects are relay K2 and resistor network Z5.
1025 (DDE:FR ) A6 330V sense buffer fault
Assuming previous A6 sense buffer tests passed, suspects are relay K1 and resistor network Z5.
1026 (DDE:FR ) A6 1000V sense buffer fault
Assuming previous A6 sense buffer tests passed, the suspect IC is U60.
1027 (DDE:FR ) A6 trim DAC 0 (3.3V) fault
Suspects include U17, U4, U25, U42, R3, R45, R51, R50, R22, and C133 on the A6 assembly.
1028 (DDE:FR ) A6 trim DAC 0 (33V) fault
Suspects include U17, U4, U25, U42, R3, R45, R51, R50, R22, and C133 on the A6 assembly.
1029 (DDE:FR ) A6 trim DAC 1 fault
Suspects include U18, U34, R131, R142, R143, and C126 on the A6 assembly.
1030 (DDE:FR ) A8 33V DC offset fault
The primary suspect IC is U1 on the A8 assembly.
1031 (DDE:FR ) A8 330V AC low F fault
Suspects include transformer T3, U16, and U13.
1032 (DDE:FR ) A8 330V AC high F fault
Suspects include transformer T2 and U4.
1033 (DDE:FR ) A8 330V DC fault
Suspects include CR4 through 6, CR16, CR19, CR20, C2, and C24 on the A8 assembly.
1034 (DDE:FR ) A8 1000V AC low F fault
Suspects include transformer T3, U16, and U13 on the A8 assembly.
1035 (DDE:FR ) A8 1000V AC high F fault
Suspects include transformer T2 and U4 on the A8 assembly.
1036 (DDE:FR ) A8 1000V DC fault
Suspects include CR4 through 6, CR16, CR19, CR20, C2, and C24 on the A8 assembly.
4-9
5500A
Service Manual
1040 (DDE:FR ) A5 interface fault
Is the A5 assembly installed? If so, suspect circuitry includes A5 digital ICs U14, U12, or CMOS switch U7, relay K15, and driver IC U15.
1041 (DDE:FR ) A5 X1 input amp fault
Suspect ICs on the A5 assembly include U34, U20, U8, U7, Q4, and Q3, as well as the
+17, and -17 V supplies and their associated circuitry.
1042 (DDE:FR ) A5 lo comp amp fault
Suspect ICs on the A5 assembly include U3, U37, U4, U5, and U7.
1043 (DDE:FR ) A5 coarse ZDAC fault
Suspect ICs on the A5 assembly include U25, U1, U24, U39, and U4.
1044 (DDE:FR ) A5 fine ZDAC fault
Suspect ICs on the A5 assembly include U22, or U23, and U4.
1045 (DDE:FR ) A5 inverting amp fault
Suspect ICs on the A5 assembly include U24, U1, and relay K16 (and respective relay driver U30).
1046 (DDE:FR ) A5 X2.45 input amp fault
Suspect ICs on the A5 assembly include U20, Q3, Q4, and noninverting amp U34 in
X2.45 gain mode, as well as U3, and U10.
1047 (DDE:FR ) A5 X3 input amp fault
Suspect ICs on the A5 assembly include U20, Q3, Q4, and noninverting amp U34 in
X3.08 gain.
1048 (DDE:FR ) A5 X13.1 input amp fault
Suspect ICs on the A5 assembly include U20, Q3, Q4, and noninverting amp U34 in
X13.1 gain mode.
1049 (DDE:FR ) A5 input leakage fault
Suspect ICs on the A5 assembly include Q3, Q4, U34, and analog MUXs U26, U27, and
U29.
1050 (DDE:FR ) A5 offset comp fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are IC U4 and resistor R17.
1051 (DDE:FR ) A5 input voltage detect fault
On the A5 assembly, suspect circuits are the +/- 17 V supplies (Zener diodes VR4 and
VR3 may be regulating too low but may be withing tolerance). Suspect ICs are U16 and
U5. Check the voltage threshold levels on U16.
4-10
Maintenance
Diagnostic Testing
4
1052 (DDE:FR ) A5 12.75 ohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are relay driver ICs U2, U15, U28, U30, and
R30 or Z2.
1053 (DDE:FR ) A5 33.25 ohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are relay driver IC U2 and resistor network Z2.
1054 (DDE:FR ) A5 100 ohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are relay driver IC U2 and resistor network Z2.
1055 (DDE:FR ) A5 325 ohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are relay driver IC U2 and resistor network Z2.
1056 (DDE:FR ) A5 1 kohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are relay driver IC U2 and resistor network Z2.
1057 (DDE:FR ) A5 3.25 kohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are relay driver IC U2 and resistor network Z2.
1058 (DDE:FR ) A5 10 kohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are relay driver IC U2 and resistor network Z2.
1059 (DDE:FR ) A5 33 kohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are relay driver IC U2 and resistor network Z1.
1060 (DDE:FR ) A5 100 kohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are relay driver IC U2 and resistor network Z1.
1061 (DDE:FR ) A5 325 kohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are IC U26, relay driver U2, and Z1.
1062 (DDE:FR ) A5 1 Mohm reference fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are IC U26, relay driver U2, and Z1.
1063 (DDE:FR ) A5 2W comp open ckt fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are protection FETs Q13, Q14, Q15, and Q16,
R77, and power supply U33.
1064 (DDE:FR ) A5 2W comp fault
Suspect components on the A5 assembly are Q1, Q2, U40, and U35.
1065 (DDE:FR ) A7 Shunt amp fault (2.2A)
Suspects include Q33,U20,U24,U6 and Z5 on the A7 Assembly. Also suspect is U31 on the A6 assembly.
4-11
5500A
Service Manual
1066 (DDE:FR ) A7 Shunt amp fault (3.3 mA)
Suspects include U6 and Z2 on the A7 assembly.
1067 (DDE:FR ) A7 Shunt amp fault (33 mA)
Suspects include U6 and Z2 on the A7 assembly.
1068 (DDE:FR ) A7 Shunt amp fault (330 mA)
Suspects include U6 and Z2 on the A7 assembly.
1069 (DDE:FR ) A7 Shunt amp fault (11A)
Suspects include K14, K15, U5, R12, R17, R47, R53, and R59 on the A7 assembly.
1070 (DDE:FR ) A7 Leakage current fault
Suspects include U5-U8,U16,U19-U20 and U23 on the A7 assembly.
1071 (DDE:FR ) A7 Output amp leakage fault
Suspects include Q2, Q3, Q4, Q6, Q7, Q10, U10, U11, U13, U14, and U17 on the A7 assembly. On the A97 SIP assembly, suspects include Q6, Q9, Q18, Q19, U2, and U3.
1072 (DDE:FR ) A7 Undercurrent fault +3.3 mA
Suspects include U19, U21, and the A97 SIP assembly on the A7 assembly.
1073 (DDE:FR ) A7 Overcurrent fault +3.3 mA
Suspects include U19, U21, and the A97 SIP assembly on the A7 assembly.
1074 (DDE:FR ) A7 Undercurrent fault -3.3 mA
Suspects include R7, R13, Q6, and U3 on the A97 assembly.
1075 (DDE:FR ) A7 Overcurrent fault -3.3 mA
Suspects include R7, R13, Q6, and U3 on the A97 assembly.
1076 (DDE:FR ) A7 Undercurrent fault +33 mA
Suspects include K5, R27, R30, Q19, and U2 on the A97 assembly.
1077 (DDE:FR ) A7 Overcurrent fault +33 mA
The primary suspect is R30 on the A97 assembly.
1078 (DDE:FR ) A7 Undercurrent fault -33 mA
Suspects include R27, Q18, and U3 on the A97 assembly.
1079 (DDE:FR ) A7 Overcurrent fault -33 mA
Suspects include R27, Q18, and U3 on the A97 assembly.
1082 (DDE:FR ) A7 Undercurrent fault +330 mA
Suspects include K18, R88, R92, R102, R105, Q10, Q1, and U13 on the A7 assembly.
4-12
Maintenance
Diagnostic Testing
4
1083 (DDE:FR ) A7 Overcurrent fault +330 mA
Suspects include K16, K17, R88, and R92 on the A7 assembly.
1080 (DDE:FR ) A7 Undercurrent fault -330 mA
Suspects include R102, R105, Q2, Q8, and U13 on the A7 assembly.
1081 (DDE:FR ) A7 Overcurrent fault -330 mA
Suspects include R102, R105, Q2, Q8, and U13 on the A7 assembly.
1086 (DDE:FR ) A7 Undercurrent fault +2.2A
Suspects include R24 and R34 on the A7 assembly.
1087 (DDE:FR ) A7 Overcurrent fault +2.2A
The primary suspect is R34 on the A97 assembly.
1084 (DDE:FR ) A7 Undercurrent fault -2.2A
The primary suspect is R24 on the A7 assembly.
1085 (DDE:FR ) A7 Overcurrent fault -2.2A
The primary suspect is R24 on the A7 assembly.
1088 (DDE:FR ) A7 Aux amp fault
Suspects include R6, R7, R44, R46, and U8 on the A7 assembly.
1089 (DDE:FR ) A7 Monitor fault (+DC)
Suspects include R18, R38, R43, R48, R52, R57, C67, CR11, and U22 on the A7 assembly.
1090 (DDE:FR ) A7 Monitor fault (-DC)
Suspects include CR9 and U22 on the A7 assembly.
4-13.
Testing the Front Panel
Press S followed by UTILITY FUNCTNS, SELF TEST, and FRONT PANEL. The menu presents the following choices: KNOB TEST, KEY TEST BELL TEST, and
DISPLAY. These tests are described next:
•
KNOB TEST -- Tests the knob encoder by showing a cursor that moves whan you turn the knob.
•
KEY TEST -- Lets you check the proper functioning of each key. When you press a key, the name of the key shows on the display. Press PREV MENU to exit this test.
•
BELL TEST -- Lets you ring the bell (beeper) for various timed periods.
•
DISPLAY -- Checks all the segments of the two displays.
4-13
5500A
Service Manual
4-14.
Internal Fuse Replacement
In addition to the operator-replaceable line fuse (see “Replacing the Line Fuse”), there are additional fuses mounted on printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) internal to the 5500A
Calibrator. The location of the internal fuses are summarized in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1. Internal Fuse Locations
Fuse Description Printed Circuit Assembly Reference Quantity Part
Number
W
0.125 A, 250 V, Slow
Blow
A5 Synthesized
Impedance
W
0.5 A, 250 V, Slow Blow A12 Filter
W
2 A, 250 V, Slow Blow A3 Motherboard
A5F2, A5F3
A12F1, A12F2
A3F1 to A3F10
2
2
10
832261
831990
806331
4-15.
Complete List of Error Messages
The following is a list of the 5500A Calibrator error messages. The error message format is shown in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2. Error Message Format
(Message Class : Description) Error
Number
0 to 65535 F Error is displayed on the front panel as it occurs
Text characters
Up to 36 text characters
QYE Query Error, caused by a full input buffer, unterminated action or interrupted action
DDE Device-Specific Error, caused by the 5500A due to some condition, for example, overrange
EXE Execution Error, caused by an element outside of, or inconsistent with, the 5500A capabilities
CME Command Error, caused by incorrect command syntax, unrecognized header, or parameter of the wrong type
R Error is queued to the remote interface as it occurs
S Error causes instrument to go to Standby
D Error causes instrument returns to the power up state
(none) Error is returned to the initiator only (i.e., local initiator or remote initiator)
0
1
(QYE: ) No Error
(DDE:FR ) Error queue overflow
100 (DDE:FR D) Inguard not responding (send)
101 (DDE:FR D) Inguard not responding (recv)
102 (DDE:FR D) Lost sync with inguard
103 (DDE:FR ) Invalid guard xing command
4-14
Maintenance
Complete List of Error Messages
4
104 (DDE:FR D) Hardware relay trip occurred
105 (DDE:FR D) Inguard got impatient
106 (DDE:FR D) A/D fell asleep
107 (DDE:FR D) Inguard watchdog timeout
201 (DDE:FR D) 5725A ROM failure
202 (DDE:FR D) 5725A RAM failure
203 (DDE:FR D) 5725A EEPROM failure
204 (DDE:FR D) 5725A data bus failure
205 (DDE:FR D) 5725A CLAMPS circuit failure
206 (DDE:FR D) 5725A HVCLR circuit failure
207 (DDE:FR D) 5725A DAC failure
208 (DDE:FR D) 5725A watchdog timer fault
209 (DDE:FR D) 5725A I heatsink too hot
210 (DDE:FRS ) Output tripped to standby
211 (DDE:FR D) 5725A compliance V exceeded
212 (DDE:FRS ) 5725A compliance V exceeded
213 (DDE:FR D) 5725A +400V did not shut off
214 (DDE:FR D) 5725A -400V did not shut off
215 (DDE:FR D) 5725A V heatsink too hot
216 (DDE:FRS ) 5725A V heatsink too hot
217 (DDE:FR D) 5725A +400V supply too small
218 (DDE:FR D) 5725A +400V supply too large
219 (DDE:FR D) 5725A -400V supply too large
220 (DDE:FR D) 5725A -400V supply too small
221 (DDE:FR D) 5725A +400V supply overI
222 (DDE:FRS ) Output tripped to standby
223 (DDE:FR D) 5725A -400V supply overI
224 (DDE:FRS ) Output tripped to standby
225 (DDE:FR D) 5725A fan not working
226 (DDE:FR D) 5725A CLAMPS fault
227 (DDE:FRS ) Output tripped to standby
228 (DDE:FR D) 5725A software TRAP
229 (DDE:FR D) 5725A cable was off
230 (DDE:FR D) 5725A RESET
231 (DDE:FR D) 5725A guard-crossing timeout
232 (DDE:FR D) 5725A illegal command
233 (DDE:FR D) 5725A non-maskable interrupt
234 (DDE:FR D) 5725A HVCLEAR tripped
235 (DDE:FRS ) Output tripped to standby
300 (DDE: ) Invalid procedure number
301 (DDE: ) No such step in procedure
302 (DDE: ) Can't change that while busy
303 (DDE: ) Can't begin/resume cal there
304 (DDE: ) Wrong unit for reference
305 (DDE: ) Entered value out of bounds
306 (DDE: ) Not waiting for a reference
307 (DDE: ) Continue command ignored
308 (DDE:FR ) Cal constant outside limits
309 (DDE:FR ) Cal try to null failed
310 (DDE:FR D) Sequence failed during cal
311 (DDE:FR D) A/D measurement failed
312 (DDE:FR ) Invalid cal step parameter
313 (DDE: ) Cal switch must be ENABLED
314 (DDE:FR ) Divide by zero encountered
315 (DDE:FR ) Must be in OPER at this step
4-15
5500A
Service Manual
316 (DDE:FR ) Open thermocouple for RJ cal
400 (DDE:FR D) Encoder not responding VERS
401 (DDE:FR D) Encoder not responding COMM
402 (DDE:FR D) Encoder not responding STAT
403 (DDE:FR ) Encoder self-test failed
404 (DDE:FR D) Queue from 5725A full
405 (DDE:FR ) Message over display R side
406 (DDE:FR ) Unmappable character #%d
[
%d is an ASCII character]
407 (DDE:FR ) Encoder did not reset
408 (DDE:FR ) Encoder got invalid command
500 (DDE: ) Internal state error
501 (DDE: ) Invalid keyword or choice
502 (DDE: ) Harmonic must be 1 - 50
503 (DDE: ) Frequency must be >= 0
504 (DDE: ) AC magnitude must be > 0
505 (DDE: ) impedance must be >= 0
506 (DDE: ) Function not available
507 (DDE: ) Value not available
508 (DDE: ) Cannot enter watts by itself
509 (DDE: ) Output exceeds user limits
510 (DDE: ) Duty cycle must be 1.0-99.0
511 (DDE: ) Power factor must be 0.0-1.0
512 (DDE: ) Can't select that field now
513 (DDE: ) Edit digit out of range
514 (DDE: ) Can't switch edit field now
515 (DDE: ) Not editing output now
516 (DDE: ) dBm works only for sine ACV
517 (DDE: ) Freq too high for non-sine
518 (DDE: ) Value outside locked range
519 (DDE: ) Must specify an output unit
520 (DDE: ) Can't do two freqs at once
521 (DDE: ) Can't source 3 values at once
522 (DDE: ) Temp must be degrees C or F
523 (DDE: ) Can't do that now
524 (DDE: ) Can't turn on the boost
525 (DDE: ) Can't turn off the boost
526 (DDE: ) Limit too small or large
527 (DDE: ) No changes except RESET now
528 (DDE:FR D) 5725A went away while in use
529 (DDE: ) Cannot edit to or from 0 Hz
530 (DDE: ) Bad state image - not loaded
531 (DDE: ) TC offset limited to +/-500 C
532 (DDE: ) Can't go to STBY in Meas TC
533 (DDE: ) Can't set an offset now
534 (DDE: ) Can't lock this range
535 (DDE: ) Can't set phase or PF now
536 (DDE: ) Can't set wave now
537 (DDE: ) Can't set harmonic now
538 (DDE: ) Can't change duty cycle now
539 (DDE: ) Can't change compensation now
540 (DDE:FR ) Current OUTPUT moved to 5725A
541 (DDE: ) TC ref must be valid TC temp
542 (DDE: ) Can't turn EARTH on now
543 (DDE: D) STA couldn't update OTD
544 (DDE: ) Can't enter W with non-sine
4-16
Maintenance
Complete List of Error Messages
4
545 (DDE: ) Can’t edit now
546 (DDE: ) Can’t set trigger to that now
547 (DDE: ) Can’t set output imp. now
548 (DDE:FR ) Compensation is now OFF
549 (DDE: ) Period must be >= 0
550 (DDE: ) A report is already printing
551 (DDE: ) -SC option not installed
600 (DDE:FR D) Outguard watchdog timeout
601 (DDE: ) Power-up RAM test failed
602 (DDE:FR ) Power-up GPIB test failed
700 (DDE: R ) Saving to NV memory failed
701 (DDE: R ) NV memory invalid
702 (DDE: R ) NV invalid so default loaded
703 (DDE: R ) NV obsolete so default loaded
800 (DDE:FR ) Serial parity error %s
[
%s is serial port]
801 (DDE:FR ) Serial framing error %s
[
%s is serial port]
802 (DDE:FR ) Serial overrun error %s
[
%s is serial port]
803 (DDE:FR ) Serial characters dropped %s
[
%s is serial port]
900 (DDE:FR ) Report timeout - aborted
1000 (DDE:FR ) Sequence failed during diag
1001 (DDE:FR ) Guard xing link diag fail
1002 (DDE:FR ) Inguard bus r/w diag fail
1003 (DDE:FR ) A6 A/D comm fault
1004 (DDE:FR ) A6 A/D or DAC fault
1005 (DDE:FR ) A6 DAC fine channel fault
1006 -1091
See “Diagnostic Error Messages”
1200 (DDE:FR ) Sequence name too long
1201 (DDE:FR ) Sequence RAM table full
1202 (DDE:FR ) Sequence name table full
1300 (CME: R ) Bad syntax
1301 (CME: R ) Unknown command
1302 (CME: R ) Bad parameter count
1303 (CME: R ) Bad keyword
1304 (CME: R ) Bad parameter type
1305 (CME: R ) Bad parameter unit
1306 (EXE: R ) Bad parameter value
1307 (QYE: R ) 488.2 I/O deadlock
1308 (QYE: R ) 488.2 interrupted query
1309 (QYE: R ) 488.2 unterminated command
1310 (QYE: R ) 488.2 query after indefinite response
1311 (DDE: R ) Invalid from GPIB interface
1312 (DDE: R ) Invalid from serial interface
1313 (DDE: R ) Service only
1314 (EXE: R ) Parameter too long
1315 (CME: R ) Invalid device trigger
1316 (EXE: R ) Device trigger recursion
1317 (CME: R ) Serial buffer full
1318 (EXE: R ) Bad number
1319 (EXE: R ) Service command failed
1320 (CME: R ) Bad binary number
1321 (CME: R ) Bad binary block
1322 (CME: R ) Bad character
1323 (CME: R ) Bad decimal number
1324 (CME: R ) Exponent magnitude too large
4-17
5500A
Service Manual
1325 (CME: R ) Bad hexadecimal block
1326 (CME: R ) Bad hexadecimal number
1328 (CME: R ) Bad octal number
1329 (CME: R ) Too many characters
1330 (CME: R ) Bad string
1331 (DDE: R ) OPER not allowed while error pending
1500 (DDE:FRS ) Compliance voltage exceeded
1501 (DDE:FRS ) Shunt amp over or underload
1502 (DDE:FRS ) Heat sink too hot
1503 (DDE:FRS ) Output current lim exceeded
1504 (DDE:FRS ) Input V or A limit exceeded
1600 (DDE:FR D) OPM transition error
1601 (DDE:FR D) TC measurement failure
1800 (DDE:FR ) Unknown boost command
1801 (DDE:FR ) BX not responding
65535
[
%d is unknown error number]
4-18
Chapter 5
List of Replaceable Parts
5-2.
5-3.
How to Contact Fluke ........................................................................... 5-3
Lists..............................................................................................
5-1
5500A
Service Manual
5-2
List of Replaceable Parts
Introduction
5
5-1.
Introduction
This chapter contains an illustrated list of replaceable parts for the 5500A Multi-Product
Calibrator to the module level only . Parts are listed by assembly; alphabetized by reference designator. Each assembly is accompanied by an illustration showing the location of each part and its reference designator. The parts lists give the following information:
•
Reference designator
•
An indication if the part is subject to damage by static discharge
•
Description
•
Fluke stock number
•
Total quantity
•
Any special notes (i.e., factory-selected part)
Caution
A * symbol indicates a device that may be damaged by static discharge.
5-2.
How to Obtain Parts
Electrical components may be ordered directly from the manufacturer by using the manufacturers part number, or from the Fluke Corporation and its authorized representatives by using the part number under the heading FLUKE STOCK NO. To order components directly from Fluke Corporation, call (toll-free) 800-526-4731. Parts price information is available from the Fluke Corporation or its representatives.
To ensure prompt delivery of the correct part, include the following information when you place an order:
•
Fluke stock number
•
Description (as given under the Description heading)
•
Quantity
•
Reference designator
•
Part number and revision level of the pca containing the part.
•
Instrument model and serial number
5-3.
How to Contact Fluke
To contact Fluke, call one of the following telephone numbers:
USA: 1-888-99-FLUKE (1-888-993-5853)
Canada: 1-800-36-FLUKE (1-800-363-5853)
Europe: +31 402-675-200
Japan: +81-3-3434-0181
Singapore: +65-738-5655
Anywhere in the world: +1-425-446-5500
Or, visit Fluke's Web site at www.fluke.com
.
5-3
5500A
Service Manual
r
Note
This instrument may contain a Nickel-Cadmium battery. Do not mix with the solid waste stream. Spent batteries should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler. Contact your authorized Fluke service center for recycling information.
5-4.
Parts Lists
The following tables list the replaceable parts for the 5500A Multi-Product Calibrator .
Parts are listed by assembly; alphabetized by reference designator. Each assembly is accompanied by an illustration showing the location of each part and its reference designator. The parts lists give the following information:
•
Reference designator
•
An indication if the part is subject to damage by static discharge
•
Description
•
Fluke stock number
•
Total quantity
•
Any special notes (i.e., factory-selected part)
Caution
A * symbol indicates a device that may be damaged by static discharge.
5-4
List of Replaceable Parts
Parts Lists
5
Reference
Designator
A3
A5
A6
A7
A7A1
A8
A12
Table 5-1. Chassis Assembly
Description
* MOTHERBOARD PCA
* SYNTHESIZED IMPEDANCE PCA
* DDS PCA
* CURRENT PCA
* LOW CURRENT AMPLIFIER PCA
* VOLTAGE PCA
* FILTER PCA
Fluke Stock
No
937375
937388
937391
937396
945332
937404
945337
Tot Qty Notes
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MP2
MP3
COVER, INSTRUMENT, TOP
COVER, INSTRUMENT, BOTTOM
MP8
MP14
MP26
INSERT, PLASTIC SIDE
BOTTOM FOOT, MOLDED, GRAY #
LABEL,CALIB, CERTIFICATION SEAL
937073
937078
1
1
937276 2
945241 1
868786 4
541730 1
802306
101345
172080
1
1
1
5-5
5500A
Service Manual
5-6
Figure 5-1. Chassis Assembly
5500A (Final Assembly)
(5 of 6) om018f.eps
List of Replaceable Parts
Parts Lists
5
Figure 5-1. Chassis Assembly (cont)
5500A (A64)
(4 of 6) om019f.eps
5-7
5500A
Service Manual
Reference
Designator
A1
A2
A10
A11
Table 5-2. Front Panel Assembly
Description
* KEYBOARD PCA
* ENCODER PCA
* TC BUTTON PCA
* TC CONNECTION PCA
Fluke Stock
No
761049
937370
945308
945485
944822
Tot Qty
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
H38
H42
J1, J2
MP3
MP5
MP8
MP13
MP14
MP18
MP19
W17
WASHER, LOW THERMAL #8
NUT, #8 LOW THERMAL
CONN,COAX,BNC(F),CABLE
859939
850334
412858
4
4
2
HANDLE,INSTRUMENT, GRAY #7
BEZEL, FRONT PANEL
886333
945238
2
1
DECAL, OUTPUT BLOCK 937263 1
DECAL, POWER ON/OFF
CALIBRATION CERTIFICATION DECAL
945258 1
945261 1
LCD MODULE,16X2 CHAR,TRANSMISSIVE 929179
LCD MODULE,40X2 CHAR,TRANSMISSIVE 929182
886312
891718
1
1
886304 1
764548 1
868794 1
945451 1
775338 1
172080 3
CABLE, OUTPUT BLOCK TO MOTHER BOARD 945365 1
5-8
List of Replaceable Parts
Parts Lists
5
Figure 5-2. Front Panel Assembly
5500A (A63)
(2 of 6) om020f.eps
5-9
5500A
Service Manual
Reference
Designator
A9
Table 5-3. Rear Panel Assembly
Description
Fluke Stock
No
937409
Tot Qty
1
Notes
* CPU PCA
E2 BINDING POST, STUD, PLATED
W
F1
W
F2, F3
102707 1
2
944269
944272
944277
1
1
1
944715
854737
2
2
MP4 HANDLE,INSTRUMENT, GRAY #7
MP19 LABEL,CALIB, CERTIFICATION SEAL
Notes
1. For 100V and 120V units only.
2. For 240V units only.
886333 2
864470 1
802306
172080
1
2
911388 1
5-10
List of Replaceable Parts
Parts Lists
5
A9 CPU PCA
H51
4X
H18
4X
W20
H6
H3
MP8
H26 4X
T1
H2
H1
MP23
MP6
H45 4X
H22 4X
MP3
H9
MP4
MP1
E1 E2
FL1 FL10 FL9
H40
2X
4X
2X
MP19
H13
H16 H49 2X
MP17 MP18
Figure 5-3. Rear Panel Assembly
5500A (A65)
(3 of 6) om021f.eps
5-11
5500A
Service Manual
5-12
Figure 5-4. Wiring Diagram
5500A (Wiring Diagram)
(6 of 6) om022f.eps
Chapter 6
Oscilloscope Calibration Options
•
Option 5500A-SC600: see page 6-3.
•
Option 5500A-SC300: see page 6-65.
6-1
5500A
Service Manual
6-2
Chapter 6
SC600 Option
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
SC600 Specifications............................................................................ 6-6
6-4.
Volt Specifications ........................................................................... 6-6
Edge Specifications .......................................................................... 6-7
Leveled Sine Wave Specifications ................................................... 6-8
Time Marker Specifications ............................................................. 6-9
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
Wave Generator Specifications ........................................................ 6-9
Pulse Generator Specifications......................................................... 6-10
6-10.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)................................ 6-10
6-11.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function) ................... 6-10
6-12.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function) ................................ 6-11
6-13.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function) ..... 6-11
6-14.
Trigger Signal Specifications ........................................................... 6-11
6-15.
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications............ 6-11
6-16.
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications ......... 6-11
6-17.
Overload Measurement Specifications............................................. 6-12
6-18.
6-19.
6-20.
6-21.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode ................................................................ 6-12
6-22.
Time Marker Mode........................................................................... 6-13
6-23.
Wave Generator Mode ..................................................................... 6-13
6-24.
Input Impedance Mode (Resistance) ................................................ 6-13
6-25.
Input Impedance Mode (Capacitance).............................................. 6-13
6-26.
Overload Mode................................................................................. 6-13
6-27.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.......................... 6-15
6-28.
SC600 Calibration Setup ...................................................................... 6-17
6-29.
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions ........ 6-18
6-30.
Overview of HP3458A Operation .................................................... 6-18
6-31.
Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements ................... 6-18
6-32.
Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave
6-33.
DC Voltage Calibration.................................................................... 6-21
6-34.
AC Voltage Calibration.................................................................... 6-21
6-3
5500A
Service Manual
6-35.
Wave Generator Calibration............................................................. 6-22
6-36.
Edge Amplitude Calibration............................................................. 6-22
6-37.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration...................................... 6-23
6-38.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration.......................................... 6-24
6-39.
6-40.
Low Frequency Calibration.......................................................... 6-24
High Frequency Calibration......................................................... 6-25
6-41.
Pulse Width Calibration ................................................................... 6-25
6-42.
MeasZ Calibration ............................................................................ 6-26
6-43.
6-44.
DC Voltage Verification................................................................... 6-29
6-45.
6-46.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-29
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-29
6-47.
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification................................................. 6-31
6-48.
6-49.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-31
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-33
6-50.
AC Voltage Frequency Verification................................................. 6-34
6-51.
Edge Amplitude Verification ........................................................... 6-35
6-52.
Edge Frequency Verification............................................................ 6-35
6-53.
Edge Duty Cycle Verification .......................................................... 6-36
6-54.
Edge Rise Time Verification ............................................................ 6-36
6-55.
Edge Abberation Verification........................................................... 6-38
6-56.
Tunnel Diode Pulser Drive Amplitude Verification......................... 6-39
6-57.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification .................................... 6-40
6-58.
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification..................................... 6-41
6-59.
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification .................................... 6-42
6-60.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification ........................................ 6-44
6-61.
6-62.
6-63.
6-64.
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness ............................ 6-44
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness............................ 6-44
Low Frequency Verification ........................................................ 6-46
High Frequency Verification........................................................ 6-46
6-65.
Time Marker Verification................................................................. 6-51
6-66.
Wave Generator Verification............................................................ 6-52
6-67.
6-68.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-52
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-53
6-69.
Pulse Width Verification .................................................................. 6-56
6-70.
Pulse Period Verification.................................................................. 6-57
6-71.
MeasZ Resistance Verification......................................................... 6-57
6-72.
MeasZ Capacitance Verification ...................................................... 6-58
6-73.
Overload Function Verification........................................................ 6-59
6-74.
SC600 Hardware Adjustments.............................................................. 6-60
6-75.
Equipment Required......................................................................... 6-60
6-76.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function ..................................... 6-60
6-77.
6-78.
6-81.
6-82.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-60
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance......................... 6-61
6-79.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ............................. 6-61
6-80.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function............................. 6-62
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-63
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations ................................................... 6-63
6-4
SC600 Option
Introduction
6
6-1.
Introduction
This chapter contains the following information and service procedures for the
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option functions.
•
Specifications
•
Theory of Operation
•
Calibration Procedures
•
Verification Procedures
•
Hardware Adjustments made after Repair
The calibration and verification procedures provide traceable results for all of the SC600 functions as long as they are performed using the recommended equipment. All of the required equipment along with the minimum specifications, are provided in Table 6-15 under “Equipment Requirements for Calibration and Verification.”
The calibration and verification procedures in this chapter are not the ones Fluke uses at the factory. These procedures have been developed to provide you with the ability to calibrate and verify the SC600 at your own site if necessary. You should review all of the procedures in advance to make sure you have the resources to complete them. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification.
Hardware adjustments that are made after repair, at the factory or designated Fluke service centers, are provided in detail.
6-2.
Maintenance
There are no maintenance techniques or diagnostic remote commands for the SC600 that are available to users. If your SC600 is not installed or not receiving power, the following error message appears on the display when you press a to access the oscilloscope calibration menus.
OM030I.EPS
IF THIS MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED, AND YOU HAVE THE SC600 INSTALLED in your Calibrator Mainframe, you must return the Calibrator Mainframe to Fluke for repair.
If you wish to purchase the SC600, contact your Fluke sales representative.
6-5
5500A
Service Manual
6-3.
SC600 Specifications
These specifications apply only to the SC600 Option. General specifications that apply to the Calibrator Mainframe (hereafter termed the Calibrator) can be found in Chapter 1.
The specifications are valid under the following conditions:
•
The Calibrator is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1.
•
The Calibrator has completed a warm-up period of at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes.
•
The SC600 Option has been active longer than 5 minutes.
6-4.
Volt Specifications
Table 6-1. Volt Specifications dc Signal
Volt Function
Square Wave Signal [1]
50
Ω
Load 1 M
Ω
Load
Amplitude Characteristics
Range
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
0 V to
±
(0.25% of output +
40
µ
V)
Sequence
Square Wave Frequency Characteristics
±
6.6 V 0 V to
Range
1 mV to 24.999 mV
25 mV to 109.99 mV
110 mV to 2.1999 V
2.2 V to 10.999 V
11 V to 130 V
±
130 V
±
1 mV to
±
6.6 V p-p
Resolution
1
µ
V
10
µ
V
100
µ
V
1 mV
10 mV
Continuously adjustable
±
(0.05% of output +
40
µ
V)
±
(0.25% of output + 40
µ
V)
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
±
±
±
1 mV to
130 V p-p
(0.1% of output +
40
µ
V) [2]
Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
Typical Aberration within 4
µ s from 50% of leading/trailing edge
10 Hz to 10 kHz
± (2.5 ppm of setting)
< (0.5% of output + 100
µ
V)
[1] Selectable positive or negative, zero referenced square wave.
[2] For square wave frequencies above 1 kHz,
±
(0.25% of output + 40
µ
V).
6-6
6-5.
Edge Specifications
SC600 Option
SC600 Specifications
Rise Time
Amplitude Range (p-p)
Typical Duty Cycle
Tunnel Diode Pulse Drive
≤
Table 6-2. Edge Specifications
Edge Characteristics into 50
300 ps
Ω
Load
5.0 mV to 2.5 V
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
(+0 ps / -100 ps)
±
(2% of output + 200
µ
V)
Adjustment Range
Sequence Values
± 10% around each sequence value (indicated below)
5 mV, 10 mV, 25 mV, 50 mV, 60 mV, 80 mV, 100 mV, 200 mV,
250 mV, 300 mV, 500 mV, 600 mV,
1 V, 2.5 V
Frequency Range [1]
Typical Jitter, edge to trigger
1 kHz to 10 MHz
< 5 ps (p-p)
Leading Edge Aberrations [2] within 2 ns from 50% of rising edge
2 to 5 ns
±
(2.5 ppm of setting)
< (3% of output + 2 mV)
5 to 15 ns after 15 ns
< (2% of output + 2 mV)
< (1% of output + 2 mV)
< (0.5% of output + 2 mV)
45% to 55%
Square wave at 100 Hz to 100 kHz, with variable amplitude of 60 V to
100 V p-p.
[1] Above 2 MHz rise time specification < 350 ps.
[2] All edge aberration measurements made with Tektronix 11801 mainframe with SD26 input module.
6
6-7
5500A
Service Manual
6-6.
Leveled Sine Wave Specifications
Table 6-3. Leveled Sine Wave Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave
Characteristics into 50
Ω
50 kHz
(reference)
Frequency Range
50 kHz to
100 MHz
100 MHz to
300 MHz
Amplitude Characteristics (for measuring oscilloscope bandwidth)
Range (p-p)
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
Flatness (relative to
50 kHz)
Short-Term Amplitude
Stability
Frequency Characteristics
±
(2% of output
+ 300
µ
V) not applicable
5 mV to 5.5 V
< 100 mV: 3 digits
≥
100 mV: 4 digits
± continuously adjustable
(3.5% of output
+ 300
µ
V)
±
(4% of output
+ 300
µ
V)
± (1.5% of output
+ 100
µ
V)
± (2% of output
+ 100
µ
V)
≤
1% [1]
300 MHz to
600 MHz
±
(6% of output
+ 300
µ
V)
± (4% of output
+ 100
µ
V)
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
Distortion Characteristics
±
2.5 ppm
2nd Harmonic
3rd and Higher
Harmonics
≤
-33 dBc
≤
-38 dBc
[1] Within one hour after reference amplitude setting, provided temperature varies no more than ± 5°C.
6-8
6-7.
Time Marker Specifications
SC600 Option
SC600 Specifications
Table 6-4. Time Marker Specifications
Time Marker
into 50
Ω
5 s to 50 ms
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty at Cardinal
Points, tcal
±
5
°
C [3]
±(25 + t * 1000) ppm [1]
Wave Shape
Typical Output Level spike or square
> 1 V p-p [2]
20 ms to
100 ns
± 2.5 ppm spike, square, or 20%-pulse
50 ns to
20 ns
± 2.5 ppm spike or square
10 ns
± 2.5 ppm square or sine
> 1 V p-p [2] > 1 V p-p [2] >1 V p-p [2]
5 ns to 2 ns
± 2.5 ppm sine
> 1 V p-p
Typical Jitter (rms) <10 ppm < 1 ppm < 1 ppm <1 ppm
Sequence (cardinal points)
5-2-1 from 5 s to 2 ns (e.g., 500 ms, 200 ms, 100 ms)
Adjustment Range At least
±
10% around each cardinal points.
Amplitude Resolution 4 digits
[
1] t is time in seconds. Examples: At 5 s the uncertainty is 5,025 ppm; At 50 ms the uncertainty is 75 ppm.
[2] Typical rise time of square wave and 20%-pulse (20% duty cycle pulse) is < 1.5 ns.
[3] Away from the cardinal points, add ±50 ppm to uncertainty
.
<1 ppm
6-8.
Wave Generator Specifications
Table 6-5. Wave Generator Specifications
Wave Generator Characteristics
Square Wave, Sine Wave, and Triangle Wave into 50
Ω
or 1 M
Ω
Amplitude
Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C,
10 Hz to 10 kHz
Sequence
Typical DC Offset Range
Frequency
into 1 M
Ω
: 1.8 mV to 55 V p-p into 50
Ω
: 1.8 mV to 2.5 V p-p
± (3% of p-p output + 100 µV)
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
0 to ± (
≥
40% of p-p amplitude) [1]
Range 10 Hz to 100 kHz
Resolution
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency
±
(25 ppm + 15 mHz)
[1] The DC offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms.
6
6-9
5500A
Service Manual
6-9.
Pulse Generator Specifications
Typical rise/fall times
Available Amplitudes
Table 6-6. Pulse Generator Specifications
Pulse Generator Characteristics
<1.5 ns
Positive pulse into 50
Ω
2.5 V, 1 V, 250 mV, 100 mV, 25 mV, 10 mV
Pulse Width
Range
Uncertainty [2]
Pulse Period
4 ns to 500 ns [1]
5%
±
2 ns
Range 20 ms to 200 ns (50 Hz to 5 MHz)
Resolution 4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency and width
±
2.5 ppm 1-Year Absolute Uncertainty at Cardinal
Points, tcal
±
5
°
C
[1] Pulse width not to exceed 40% of period.
[2] Pulse width uncertainties for periods below 2
µ s are not specified.
6-10.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)
Table 6-7. Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)
Time Marker
Period
Division Ratio [1]
Amplitude into 50
Ω
(p-p)
20 ms to 150 ns off/1/10/100
≥
1 V
6-11.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function)
Typical Rise Time
≤
2 ns
Pulse Period
5 s to 750 ns
34.9 ms to
7.5 ns
34.9 ms to 2 ns
Table 6-8. Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function)
Division Ratio [1]
off/1 off/10
Amplitude into 50
Ω
(p-p)
≥
1 V
≥
1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤
≤
2 ns
2 ns off/100
≥
1 V
≤
2 ns
6-10
6-12.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function)
SC600 Option
SC600 Specifications
Table 6-9. Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function)
Edge Signal
Frequency
Division
Ratio
1 kHz to 10 MHz off/1
Typical Amplitude into 50
Ω
(p-p)
≥
1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤
2 ns
Typical Lead Time
40 ns
6-13.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function)
Table 6-10. Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function)
Edge Signal
Frequency
10 Hz to 10 kHz
Division
Ratio
off/1
Typical Amplitude into 50
Ω
(p-p)
≥
1 V
6-14.
Trigger Signal Specifications
Typical Rise Time Typical Lead Time
≤
2 ns 1
µ s
6
Table 6-11. TV Trigger Signal Specifications
Trigger Signal Type Parameters
Field Formats
Polarity
Amplitude into 50
Ω
(p-p)
Line Marker
Selectable NTSC, SECAM, PAL, PAL-M
Selectable inverted or uninverted video
Adjustable 0 to 1.5 V p-p into 50 ohm load, (
±
7% accuracy)
Selectable Line Video Marker
6-15.
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications
Measurement Range
Uncertainty
Table 6-12. Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications
Scope input selected 50
Ω
1
40
Ω
to 60
Ω
500
0.1 % 0.1 %
6-16.
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications
Table 6-13. Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications
Scope input selected
Measurement Range
Uncertainty
1 M
Ω
5 pF to 50 pF
±
(5% of input + 0.5 pF) [1]
[1] Measurement made within 30 minutes of capacitance zero reference. SC600 option must be selected for at least five minutes prior to any capacitance measurement, including the zero process.
6-11
5500A
Service Manual
6-17.
Overload Measurement Specifications
Source
Voltage
5 V to 9 V
Table 6-14. Overload Measurement Specifications
Typical ‘On’ current indication
100 mA to 180 mA
Typical ‘Off’ current
10 mA
indication
Maximum Time Limit DC or
AC (1 kHz)
setable 1 s to 60 s
6-18.
Theory of Operation
The following discussion provides a brief overview of the following SC600 operating modes: voltage, edge, leveled sine wave, time marker, wave generator, video, pulse generator, input impedance, and overload. This discussion will allow you to identify which of the main plug-in boards of the Calibrator Mainframe are defective. Figure 6-1 shows a block diagram of the SC600 Option, also referred to as the A50 board. Functions that are not depicted in the figure are generated from the DDS Assembly (A6 board). For a diagram of all Calibrator Mainframe board assemblies, refer to Figure 2-1.
6-19.
Voltage Mode
All signals for the voltage function are generated from the A51 Voltage/Video board, a daughter card to the A50 board. A dc reference voltage is supplied to the A51 board from the A6 DDS board; all dc and ac oscilloscope output voltages are derived from this signal and generated on the A51 board. The output of the A51 board is passed to the A50 Signal board (also attached to the A50 board) and attenuator module and is then cabled to the output connectors on the front panel. The reference dc signal is used to generate both + and - dc and ac signals that are amplified or attenuated to provide the complete range of output signals.
6-20.
Edge Mode
The edge clock originates on the DDS A6 board and is passed to the A50 board. The signal is then shaped and split to generate the fast edge and external trigger signals. The edge signal is passed from the A50 board first to the attenuator assembly (where range attenuation occurs) and then to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
6-21.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode
All of the leveled sine wave signals (from 50 kHz to 600 MHz) are produced on the A50 board. The leveled sine wave signal is passed from the A50 board to the on-board attenuator assembly. The attenuator assembly provides range attenuation and also contains a power detector which maintains amplitude flatness across the frequency range.
The signal is then passed to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
6-12
SC600 Option
Theory of Operation
6-22.
Time Marker Mode
There are 3 primary “ranges” of time marker operation: 5 s to 20 ms, 10 ms to 2
µ s, and
1
µ s to 2 ns.
The 5 s to 20 ms markers are generated on the A6 DDS board and are passed to the A50 board. The signal path is also split to drive the external trigger circuitry on the A50 board. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel. The marker signal passing through the A50 board is connected to the attenuator assembly.
The signal is then passed to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The 10 ms to 2
µ s markers are derived from a square wave signal that is generated on the
A6 board and passed to the A50 board for wave shaping and external trigger generation.
If the trigger is turned on, the signal is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
The marker signal is passed from the A50 board to the attenuator assembly and then to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The 1
µ s to 2 ns markers are generated from the leveled sine wave generator on the A50 board. This signal is also split to drive the external trigger circuits. If the trigger is turned on, the signal is then connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel. The other path routes the signal to the marker circuits on the A50 board, where the signal is shaped into the other marker waveforms. The marker signals are passed from the A50 board to the attenuator assembly and on to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
6
6-23.
Wave Generator Mode
All signals for the wavegen function are generated from the A6 board and are passed to the A50 board. They are then sent to the attenuator assembly, where range attenuation occurs. Wavegen signals are then sent to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
Pulse Generator ModesVideo and pulse generator mode signals are derived entirely from dedicated circuitry on the A50 SC600 option board. If there are faults associated only with these functions, the A50 board most likely needs replacement.
6-24.
Input Impedance Mode (Resistance)
The reference resistors for this mode are on the A50 board, while the DCV reference signal and measuring signals are on the A6 DDS board.
6-25.
Input Impedance Mode (Capacitance)
Capacitance measurement circuits are contained on the A50 SC600 Scope Option board, utilizing signals from the leveled sine wave source. If there are faults associated only with capacitance measurement, the A50 board most likely needs replacement.
6-26.
Overload Mode
The source voltage for the overload mode is generated on the A51 Voltage/Video board of the A50 SC600 Option board. The voltage is applied to the external 50
Ω load, and the circuit current is monitored by the A6 DDS board.
6-13
5500A
Service Manual
LF PWB
A6
DDS
50
Ω
Time Mark
II
Analog Shaped
2
µ s - 10
µ s
Time Mark
III
Pulse Shaped
20
µ s - 1
µ s
LF Mux.
Trigger
÷1,10,100,1000
Oscilloscope
Calibrator
Trigger BNC
External
Clock In
Leveled Sine Wave and Time Mark
IV
Unleveled
Leveled
PLLs
Pwr Amp.
Leveling Loop
Level
Edge
10 MHz Clock
HF Mux.
HF PWB
Step Attenuator Module
SCOPE
Output BNC
HF Mux.
pp detect
A4 SC600 Option om031f.eps
Figure 6-1. SC600 Block Diagram
6-14
SC600 Option
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
6-27.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
Table 6-15 lists the equipment, recommended models, and minimum specifications required for each calibration and verification procedure.
6
Table 6-15. SC600 Calibration and Verification Equipment
Wave Generator and Edge Amplitude Calibration, AC Voltage and TD Pulser Verification
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
Digital
Multimeter
HP 3458A
Voltage
1.8 mV to
±
130 V p-p Uncertainty: 0.06%
Edge 4.5 mV to 2.75 V p-p Uncertainty: 0.06%
Termination Feedthrough 50
Ω
± 1% (used with Edge Amplitude
Calibration and AC Voltage Verification)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
Edge Rise Time and Aberrations Verification
High-
Frequency
Digital Storage
Oscilloscope
Attenuator
Tektronix 11801 with
Tektronix SD-22/26 sampling head, or
Tektronix TDS 820 with
8 GHz bandwidth
Weinschel 9-10 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-10 or equivalent
Resolution 4.5 mV to 2.75 V
10 dB, 3.5 mm (m/f)
Adapter
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration and Verification
Fluke 5790A
Range 5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
AC
Measurement
Standard
Termination
BNC Cable
Feedthrough 50
Ω
± 1%.
(supplied with SC600)
DC and AC Voltage Calibration and Verification, DC Voltage Verification
Digital
Multimeter
HP 3458A
Termination
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
Feedthrough 50
Ω
± 1%.
6-15
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-15. SC600 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Pulse Width Calibration and Verification
High-Frequency Digital
Storage Oscilloscope
Attenuator
Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix SD-
22/26 sampling head
3 dB, 3.5 mm (m/f)
Adapter (2)
BNC Cable
Frequency
Counter
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m)
(supplied with SC600)
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
PM 6680 with option (PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and (PM 9690 or PM 9691)
50 kHz to 600 MHz, <0.15 ppm uncertainty
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m) Adapter
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
Standard
Adapter
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (Low Frequency) Calibration and Verification
AC Measurement Fluke 5790A with -03 option
Pomona #3288
Range
Frequency
5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
50 kHz to 10 MHz
BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
Spectrum Analyzer
Adapter
Frequency Counter
BNC Cable
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
HP 8590A
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
Pulse Period, Edge Frequency, AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Frequency Counter PM 6680 with option (PM
9690 or PM 9691)
20 ms to 150 ns, 10 Hz to 10 MHz: <0.15 ppm uncertainty
BNC Cable
Termination
(supplied with SC600)
Edge Duty Cycle
PM 6680
(supplied with SC600)
Overload Functional Verification
Feedthrough 50
Ω
± 1%.
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
MeasZ Resistance, Capacitance Verification
Resistors
Capacitors
Adapters
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
50 pF nominal value at the end of BNC(f) connector to connect resistors and capacitors to BNC(f) connector
6-16
SC600 Option
SC600 Calibration Setup
Table 6-15. SC600 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (High Frequency) Calibration and Verification
Instrument Model
Power Meter Hewlett-Packard
E4418A
Range
Frequency
Power Sensor Hewlett-Packard 8482A Range
Frequency
Power Sensor Hewlett-Packard 8481D Range
Frequency
Minimum Use Specifications
-42 to +5.6 dBm
10 - 600 MHz
-20 to +19 dBm
10 - 600 MHz
-42 to -20 dBm
10 - 600 MHz
30 dB
Reference
Attenuator
Hewlett-Packard
11708A
(supplied with HP
8481D)
Adapter Hewlett-Packard BNC(f) to Type N(f)
PN 1250-1474
BNC Cable
Frequency
Counter
Adapter
(supplied with SC600)
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency, Time Marker Verification
2 ns to 5 s, 50 kHz to 600 MHz: <0.15 ppm uncertainty PM 6680 with option
(PM 9621, PM 9624, or
PM 9625) and (PM
9690 or PM 9691)
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
Wave Generator Verification
AC
Measurement
Fluke 5790A
Standard
Range
Frequency
1.8 mV p-p to 55 V p-p
10 Hz to 100 kHz
6
Termination
Feedthrough 50
Ω
± 1%.
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
6-28.
SC600 Calibration Setup
The procedures in this manual have been developed to provide users the ability to calibrate the SC600 at their own site if they are required to do so. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification. The Calibrator Mainframe must be fully calibrated prior to performing any of the SC600 calibration procedures.
The hardware adjustments are intended to be one-time adjustments performed in the factory, however, adjustment may be required after repair. Hardware adjustments must be performed prior to calibration. Calibration must be performed after any hardware adjustments. See “Hardware Adjustments” in this chapter.
The AC Voltage function is dependent on the DC Voltage function. Calibration of the
AC Voltage function is required after the DC Voltage is calibrated.
6-17
5500A
Service Manual
The Calibrator Mainframe must complete a warm-up period and the SC600 must be enabled for at least 5 minutes prior to calibration to allow internal components to thermally stabilize. The Calibrator Mainframe warm-up period is at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes. The SC600 is enabled by pressing the front panel SCOPE key. The green indicator on the SCOPE key will be illuminated when the SC600 is enabled.
Much of the SC600 can be calibrated interactively from the front panel. Enable the
SC600 and wait at least 5 minutes. Enter Scope Cal mode by pressing the front panel
SETUP key, CAL blue softkey, second CAL blue softkey, and SCOPE CAL blue softkey. Entering Scope Cal mode prior to having the SC600 enabled for at least 5 minutes will cause a warning message to be displayed.
All equipment specified for SC600 calibration must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be maintained, and operating within their normal specified operating environment. It is also important to ensure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up prior to its use. Refer to each equipment’s operating manual for details.
Before you begin calibration, you may wish to review all of the procedures in advance to ensure you have the resources to complete them.
The Calibrator Mainframe first prompts the user to calibrate the DC Voltage function. If another function is to be calibrated, alternately press the OPTIONS and NEXT
SECTION blue softkeys until the desired function is reached.
6-29.
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage
Functions
The Voltage, Edge, and Wave Generator functions have square wave voltages that need to be calibrated or verified. The HP3458A digital multimeter can be programmed from either the front panel or over the remote interface to make these measurements.
6-30.
Overview of HP3458A Operation
The Hewlett-Packard 3458A digital multimeter is setup as a digitizer to measure the peak-to-peak value of the signal. It is set to DCV, using various analog-to-digital integration times and triggering commands to measure the topline and baseline of the square wave signal.
6-31.
Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements
By controlling the HP 3458A’s integration and sample time, it can be used to make accurate, repeatable measurements of both the topline and baseline of the Voltage Square
Wave up to 10 kHz. To make these measurements, the HP 3458A’s External Trigger function is used in conjunction with the SC600’s External Trigger output. In general, the
HP 3458A is setup to make an analog-to-digital conversion after receiving the falling edge of an external trigger. The conversion does not take place until a time determined by the 3458A “DELAY” command. The actual integration time is set according to the frequency that the DMM is measuring. Table 6-16 below summarizes the DMM settings required to make topline and baseline measurements. Figure 6-2 illustrates the proper connections for this setup.
6-18
SC600 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
Table 6-16. Voltage HP3458A Settings
Voltage
HP 3458A Settings
Input Frequency NPLC DELAY (topline) DELAY (baseline)
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
.1
.01
.002
.007 s
.0007 s
.00014
.012 s
.0012 s
.00024
10 kHz .001 .00007 .00012
For all measurements, the HP 3458A is in DCV, manual ranging, with external trigger enabled. A convenient method to make these measurements from the HP 3458A’s front panel is to program these settings into several of the user defined keys on its front panel.
For example, to make topline measurements at 1 kHz, you would set the DMM to “NPLC
.01; DELAY .0007; TRIG EXT”. To find the average of multiple readings, you can program one of the keys to “MATH OFF; MATH STAT” and then use the “RMATH
MEAN” function to recall the average or mean value.
Note
For this application, if making measurements of a signal > 1 kHz, the HP
3458A has been known to have .05% to .1% peaking. For these signals, lock the HP 3458A to the 1V range.
6
HP 3458A (Front)
SC600 Cable
5500A-SC600
5500A CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50
Ω
Feedthrough
Termination
NORMAL AUX
V, ,
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
RTD
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
HP 3458A (Rear)
Figure 6-2. Equipment Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements
om054f.eps
6-19
5500A
Service Manual
6-32.
Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements
The setup to measure the topline and baseline of Edge and Wave Generator signals differs slightly from the Voltage Square Wave method described above. The HP 3458A is triggered by a change in input level instead of an external trigger. The trigger level is set to 1% of the DCV range, with AC coupling of the trigger signal. The delay after the trigger event is also changed for the Edge and Wave Generator functions. See Table 6-17 and Figure 6-3.
Input Frequency
1 kHz
10 kHz
Table 6-17. Edge and Wave Generator HP3458A Settings
.01
.001
NPLC
HP 3458A Settings
DELAY (topline)
.0002 s
.00002 s
DELAY (baseline)
.0007 s
.00007 s
HP 3458A
SC600 Cable
5500A-SC600
5500A CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50
Ω
Feedthrough
Termination
NORMAL AUX
V, ,
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
RTD
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX om055f.eps
Figure 6-3. Equipment Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements.
For all measurements, the HP 3458A is in DCV, manual ranging, with level triggering enabled. A convenient method to make these measurements from the HP 3458A’s front panel is to program these settings into several of the user defined keys on its front panel.
For example, to make topline measurements at 1 kHz, you would set the DMM to
“NPLC .01; LEVEL 1; DELAY .0002; TRIG LEVEL”. To find the average of multiple readings, you can program one of the keys to “MATH OFF; MATH STAT” and then use the “RMATH MEAN” function to recall the average or mean value. Refer to Figure 6-3 for the proper connections.
6-20
SC600 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
6-33.
DC Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
6
Note
Calibrating DC Voltage requires AC Voltage calibration.
Refer to Figure 6-3 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe in Scope Cal mode, DC Voltage section. Then follow these steps to calibrate DC Voltage.
1. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Ensure the HP 3458A reading is 0.0 V DC
±
10
µ
V. If not, adjust R121 on A41.
R121 is a square, single-turn pot and is marked on the board located near Q29.
5. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
6. Calibration voltages 33 V and greater will automatically put the Calibrator
Mainframe output in standby. When this occurs, press O on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Allow the HP 3458A DC voltage reading to stabilize. Enter the reading via the Calibrator Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, occurs, repair may be necessary.
µ
, n, p). If the warning still
7. Repeat steps 6 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate AC Voltage. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
AC Voltage must now be calibrated: continue with the next section.
6-34.
AC Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the same equipment and setup as DC Voltage calibration.Refer to
Figure 6-3. DC voltages are measured and entered in the Calibrator Mainframe to calibrate the AC Voltage function.
Set up the Calibrator Mainframe to Cal ACV. Press OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “The next steps calibrate -SC600 ACV”. Then follow these steps to calibrate AC Voltage.
1. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2. Allow the HP 3458A DC voltage reading to stabilize. Enter the reading via the
Calibrator Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
6-21
5500A
Service Manual
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
3. Repeat step 2 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate WAVEGEN. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6-35.
Wave Generator Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Within the calibration menu, press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “WAVEGEN Cal:”. Then follow these steps to calibrate the Wave
Generator:
1. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
3. For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to retrieve the average or mean value. See “Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Generator Measurements” for more details.
6-36.
Edge Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
Refer to Figure 6-3 for the proper setup connections. Press the OPTIONS and NEXT
SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure fast edge amplitude”. Then follow these steps to calibrate edge amplitude:.
1. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana.
2. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at
6-22
SC600 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
each step. Note that in the EDGE function, the topline is very near 0 V, and the baseline is a negative voltage.
3. For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to enter the average or mean value. See “Setup for SC600 Edge and
Wave Generator Measurements” for more details.
The “true amplitude” of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance.
6-37.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug Adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure leveled sine amplitude”. Then follow these steps to calibrate Leveled Sine
Wave amplitude.
1. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Press O to activate operating mode on the Calibrator Mainframe.
5. Allow the 5790A rms reading to stabilize. Multiply the 5790A reading by (0.5 * (50
+ Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Enter the corrected rms reading via the Calibrator
Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and calculation and carefully re-enter the corrected rms reading insuring proper multiplier
(i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
6. Repeat step 5 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate Leveled Sine flatness. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6
6-23
5500A
Service Manual
6-24
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
10V PEAK
MAX
INPUT1 INPUT1 INPUT1 SHUNT INPUT1
2.2 mV
6
7 mV
0
2.2 mV
22 mV
7
220 mV
8
70 mV
1
700 mV
2
2.2 V
9
3
4
22 V .
220 mV
+/-
5
1kV
ENTER
DELETE
CLEAR
AUTO MAN
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
VIEW
REF
SPEC
POWER
I
O
5500A CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
MAX
LO
20V PK
MAX
1V PK
MAX
20V
MAX
TRIG
OUT
TC
20V PK
MAX
STBY
7
4
1
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
8
5
2
9
6
3
µ m n k p
M dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU
F sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
CE
MEAS
TC
MULT x
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Figure 6-4. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard
om034f.eps
6-38.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration
Leveled Sine Wave flatness calibration is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to 10
MHz (low frequency) and >10 MHz to 600 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Flatness calibration of the low frequency band is made relative to 50 kHz. Flatness calibration of the high frequency band is made relative to 10
MHz.
Leveled Sine Wave flatness is calibrated at multiple amplitudes. Both low and high frequency bands are calibrated at each amplitude. Calibration begins with the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the first amplitude, followed by the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the second amplitude, and so on, until the flatness calibration is complete.
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure leveled sine flatness”.
6-39.
Low Frequency Calibration
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the 5790A WIDEBAND input as described under “Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness”.
Follow these steps to calibrate low frequency Leveled Sine Wave flatness for the amplitude being calibrated.
1. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2. Establish the 50 kHz reference:
•
Allow the 5790A rms reading to stabilize.
•
Press the 5790A Set Ref blue softkey. (Clear any previous reference by pressing the 5790A Clear Ref blue softkey prior to setting the new reference if required.)
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Adjust the amplitude using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until the
5790A reference deviation matches the 50 kHz reference within 1000 ppm.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the reference frequency is now 10 MHz. Continue with the high frequency calibration.
SC600 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
6-40.
High Frequency Calibration
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the power meter and power sensor as described under “Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness”.
Follow these steps to calibrate high frequency Leveled Sine Wave flatness for the amplitude being calibrated.
1. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2. Establish the 10 MHz reference:
•
Press the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to enter the power sensor’s 10 MHz Cal Factor. Ensure that the factor is correct, then press the power meter ENTER key.
•
Allow the power meter reading to stabilize.
•
Press the Power meter REL key.
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Press the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to enter the power sensor’s Cal Factor for the frequency displayed on the Calibrator
Mainframe. Ensure that the factor is correct, then press the power meter ENTER key.
5. Adjust the amplitude using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until the power sensor reading matches the 10 MHz reference within 0.1%.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that either the reference frequency is now 50 kHz or that the next steps calibrate pulse width.
Repeat the low frequency calibration procedure for the next amplitude unless the
Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate pulse width. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6
6-41.
Pulse Width Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix SD-
22/26 sampling head
•
3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
•
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
•
second BNC cable
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure Pulse Width”. Then follow these steps to calibrate pulse width:
1. Connect the BNC cable supplied with the SC600 to the Calibrator Mainframe’s
SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to one BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter then to the DSO’s sampling head through the 3 dB attenuator.
2. Using the second BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter and BNC cable, connect the
Calibrator Mainframe’s TRIG OUT connector to the 11801’s Trigger Input.
6-25
5500A
Service Manual
3. Set the DSO to these parameters:
•
Main Time Base position (initial): 40 ns
•
Vertical scale:
•
Trigger:
200 mV/div, +900 mV offset source = ext; level = 0.5 V; ext atten = x10; slope = +; mode = auto
•
Measurement Function: positive
4. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
5. Adjust the DSO horizontal scale and main time base position until the pulse signal spans between half and the full display. If no pulse is output, increase the pulse width using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until a pulse is output.
6. If prompted to adjust the pulse width by the Calibrator Mainframe display, adjust the pulse width to as close to 4 ns as possible using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob, then press the GO ON blue softkey.
7. Allow the DSO width reading to stabilize. Enter the reading via the Calibrator
Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe issues a warning when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs, recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the reading with the proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, enter a value between the displayed pulse width and the previously entered value. Keep attempting this, moving closer and closer to the displayed pulse width, until the value is accepted. Complete the pulse width calibration procedure. The pulse width calibration procedure must now be repeated until all entered values are accepted the first time without warning.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the Calibrator Mainframe display prompts to connect a resistor. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6-42.
MeasZ Calibration
The MeasZ function is calibrated using resistors and a capacitor of known values. The actual resistance and capacitance values are entered while they are being measure by the
Calibrator Mainframe.
The resistors and capacitor must make a solid connection to a BNC(f) to enable a connection to the end of the BNC cable supplied with the SC600. The resistance and capacitance values must be known at this BNC(f) connector. Fluke uses an HP 3458A
DMM to make a 4-wire ohms measurement at the BNC(f) connector to determine the actual resistance values and an HP 4192A Impedance Analyzer at 10 MHz to determine the actual capacitance value.
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Resistors of known values: 1M
Ω
and 50
Ω
nominal
•
adapters to connect resistors to BNC(f) connector
•
adapters and capacitor to achieve 50 pF nominal value at the end of BNC(f) connector
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-5 for setup connections.
6-26
BNC(F)
SC600 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
6
5500A-SC600
5500A
CALIBRATOR
SC600
Cable
NORMAL AUX
V, ,
A, -SENSE,
RTD
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX om056f.eps
Figure 6-5. MeasZ Function Calibration Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe in Scope Cal mode at the prompt to connect a 50
Ω
resistor.
Then follow these steps to calibrate MeasZ.
1. Connect the BNC cable to the SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the BNC(f) connector attached to the 50
Ω
resistance.
2. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
3. Enter the actual 50
Ω
resistance.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the actual resistance insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
4. When prompted by the Calibrator Mainframe, disconnect the 50
Ω
resistance and connect the 1M
Ω
resistance to the end of the BNC cable.
5. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
6. Enter the actual 1M
Ω
resistance.
7. When prompted for the first reference capacitor by the Calibrator Mainframe, disconnect the 1M
Ω
resistance and leave nothing attached to the end of the BNC cable.
8. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
9. Enter 0.
10. When prompted for the second reference capacitor by the Calibrator Mainframe, connect the 50 pF capacitance to the end of the BNC cable.
11. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
12. Enter the actual 50 pF capacitance.
6-27
5500A
Service Manual
13. The Calibrator Mainframe will prompt that the calibration is complete. Press the
OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6-43.
Verification
All of the Oscilloscope Calibration functions should be verified at least once per year, or each time the SC600 is calibrated. The verification procedures in this section provide traceable results; however the factory uses different procedures and instruments of higher precision than those described here. The procedures in this manual have been developed to provide users the ability to verify the SC600 at their own site if they are required to do so. Fluke strongly recommends that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification.
All equipment specified for SC600 verification must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be maintained, and operating within their normal specified operating environment. It is also important to ensure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up prior to its use. Refer to each equipment’s operating manual for details.
Before you begin verification, you may wish to review all of the procedures in advance to ensure you have the resources to complete them.
All of the SC600 functions are listed in Table 6-18, with the verification technique indicated.
Table 6-18. Verification Methods for SC600 Functions
DC Voltage
AC Voltage amplitude
AC Voltage frequency
Edge amplitude
Edge frequency, duty cycle, rise time
Tunnel Diode Pulser amplitude
Leveled sine wave amplitude, frequency, harmonics, and flatness
Time marker period
Wave generator amplitude
Pulse width, period
MeasZ resistance, capacitance
Overload functionality
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual. See “Voltage and Edge Calibration and Verification” for details.
Procedures provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
6-28
SC600 Option
Verification
6-44.
DC Voltage Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
For DC voltage verification, refer to Figure 6-3 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Then follow these steps to verify the wave generator function.
6
6-45.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
For the 1 M
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 1 M
Ω
(The blue softkey under
Output @ toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
2. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-19. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3. Allow the HP 3458A reading to stabilize, then record the HP 3458A reading for each voltage in Table 6-19.
4. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-46.
Verification at 50
Ω
For the 50
Ω
verification, connect the SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable and the 50
Ω
termination connected to the BNC to Banana Plug adapter.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 50
Ω
(The blue softkey under
Output @ toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
2. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-20. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3. Allow the HP 3458A reading to stabilize, then record the HP 3458A reading for each voltage in Table 6-20.
4. Compare result to tolerance columns.
6-29
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-19. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
Calibrator Mainframe output
-17.5 mV
24.9 mV
-24.9 mV
25.0 mV
-25.0 mV
67.5 mV
-67.5 mV
109.9 mV
-109.9 mV
110 mV
-110 mV
305 mV
-305 mV
499 mV
-499 mV
0 mV
1.25 mV
-1.25 mV
2.49 mV
-2.49 mV
2.5 mV
-2.5 mV
6.25 mV
-6.25 mV
9.90 mV
-9.90 mV
10.0 mV
-10.0 mV
17.5 mV
0.50 V
-0.50 V
1.35 V
-1.35 V
2.19 V
-2.19 V
2.20 V
-2.20 V
6.60 V
-6.60 V
10.99 V
-10.99 V
11.0 V
-11.0 V
70.5 V
-70.5 V
130.0 V
-130.0 V
HP 3458A Reading (V DC) Tolerance (V DC)
0.00004 V
4.063E-05 V
4.063E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.313E-05 V
4.313E-05 V
4.495E-05 V
4.495E-05 V
0.000045 V
0.000045 V
4.875E-05 V
4.875E-05 V
5.245E-05 V
5.245E-05 V
0.0000525 V
0.0000525 V
7.375E-05 V
7.375E-05 V
9.495E-05 V
9.495E-05 V
0.000095 V
0.000095 V
0.0001925 V
0.0001925 V
0.0002895 V
0.0002895 V
0.00029 V
0.00029 V
0.000715 V
0.000715 V
0.001135 V
0.001135 V
0.00114 V
0.00114 V
0.00334 V
0.00334 V
0.005535 V
0.005535 V
0.00554 V
0.00554 V
0.03529 V
0.03529 V
0.06504 V
0.06504 V
6-30
SC600 Option
Verification
Calibrator
Mainframe output
0 mV
2.49 mV
-2.49 mV
9.9 mV
-9.9 mV
24.9 mV
-24.9 mV
109.9 mV
-109.9 mV
499 mV
-499 mV
2.19 V
-2.19 V
6.599 V
-6.599 V
Table 6-20. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Tolerance
Agilent 3458A Reading
MIN MAX
-0.040 mV
2.4438 mV
-2.5362 mV
9.835 mV
-9.965 mV
24.798 mV
-25.002 mV
109.585 mV
-110.215 mV
497.71 mV
-500.29 mV
2.1845 V
-2.1955 V
6.5825 V
-6.6155 V
0.040 mV
2.5362 mV
-2.4438 mV
9.965 mV
-9.835 mV
25.002 mV
-24.798 mV
110.215 mV
-109.585 mV
500.29 mV
-497.71 mV
2.1955 V
-2.1845 V
6.6155 V
-6.5825 V
6-47.
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
•
BNC cable to connect the Calibrator Mainframe TRIG OUT to the HP 3458A Ext
Trig
For AC voltage amplitude verification, refer to Figure 6-2 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Then follow these steps to verify the AC Voltage function.
6
6-48.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
For the 1 M
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe TRIG OUT connector to the HP 3458A Ext Trig connector located on the rear of that instrument.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 1 M
Ω
. (The blue softkey under
Output @ toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
.)
6-31
5500A
Service Manual
1. When making measurements at 1 kHz, set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01,
TRIG EXT, and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the topline of the wave form, and the DELAY to .0012 for measuring the baseline of the wave form. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
2. Enable the Calibrator Mainframe external trigger by toggling the blue softkey under
TRIG to /1.
3. Measure the topline first, as indicated in Table 6-21. For each measurement, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A MATH functions to determine the average or mean value. See “Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave
Measurements” for more details.
4. Measure the baseline of each output after the corresponding topline measurement, as indicated in Table 6-21. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
5. When making measurements at the other frequencies, set up the HP 3458A (NPLC and topline and baseline DELAY) per Table 6-16. (See “Setup for SC600 Voltage
Square Wave Measurements.”)
Calibrator
Mainframe
Output
(1 kHz, or as noted)
1 mV
HP 3458A
Range
-1 mV
10 mV
-10 mV
25 mV
-25 mV
110 mV
-110 mV
500 mV
-500 mV
2.2 V
-2.2 V
11 V
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
1 V dc
1 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
-11 V
130 V
10 V dc
1000 V dc
-130 V 1000 V dc
200 mV, 100 Hz 1 V dc
200 mV, 1 kHz 1 V dc
200 mV, 5 kHz 1 V dc
200 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
2.2 V, 100 Hz 10 V dc
2.2 V, 5 kHz 10 V dc
2.2 V, 10 kHz 10 V dc
Table 6-21. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
Topline
Reading
Baseline
Reading Peak-to-Peak Tolerance (
±
V)
0.000041
0.000041
0.00005
0.00005
0.000065
0.000065
0.00015
0.00015
0.00054
0.00054
0.00224
0.00224
0.01104
0.01104
0.13004
0.13004
0.00024
0.00024
0.00054
0.00054
0.00224
0.00554
0.00554
6-32
SC600 Option
Verification
6-49.
Verification at 50
Ω
For the 50
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe, the external
50
Ω
termination, and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. (The 50
Ω
termination is closest to the HP 3458A input.) Connect the Calibrator Mainframe TRIG OUT connector to the HP 3458A Ext Trig connector located on the rear of that instrument. Make sure the
Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 50
Ω
. (The blue softkey under Output @ toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
). Proceed with the following steps:
1. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, TRIG EXT, and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the topline of the wave form, and the DELAY to .0012 for measuring the baseline of the wave form. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step. See Table 6-22.
2. Enable the Calibrator Mainframe external trigger by toggling the blue softkey under
TRIG to /1.
3. Measure the topline first, as indicated in Table 6-22. For each measurement, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A MATH functions to determine the average or mean value. See “Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave
Measurements” for more details.
4. Measure the baseline of each output after the corresponding topline measurement, as indicated in Table 6-22. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
6
Calibrator
Mainframe
Output
(1 kHz)
HP 3458A
Range
1 mV
-1 mV
10 mV
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
-10 mV 100 mV dc
25 mV 100 mV dc
-25 mV 100 mV dc
110 mV 100 mV dc
-110 mV 100 mV dc
500 mV 1 V dc
-500 mV 1 V dc
2.2 V 10 V dc
-2.2 V
6.6 V
-6.6 V
10 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
Table 6-22. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Topline
Reading
Baseline
Reading Peak-to-Peak
Peak-to-Peak x
Correction
Tolerance
(
±
V)
0.000043
0.000043
0.000065
0.000065
0.000103
0.000103
0.000315
0.000315
0.00129
0.00129
0.00554
0.00554
0.01654
0.01654
6-33
5500A
Service Manual
6-50.
AC Voltage Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM
9691)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
5500A-SC600
5500A CALIBRATOR
SC600 Cable
PM 6680A
At 50 MHZ
NORMAL AUX
V, , A, -SENSE,
RTD AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
om057f.eps
Figure 6-6. AC Voltage Frequency Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify AC Voltage frequency.
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 1M
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.1 V at each frequency listed in Table
6-23.
4. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-23. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 6-23.
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 2.1 V p-p)
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
Table 6-23. AC Voltage Frequency Verification
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency) Tolerance
0.000025 Hz
0.00025 Hz
0.0025 Hz
0.025 Hz
6-34
SC600 Option
Verification
6-51.
Edge Amplitude Verification
For the Edge Amplitude verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator
Mainframe, the external 50
Ω
termination, and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
(The 50
Ω
termination is closest to the HP 3458A input.)
1. For measurements of a 1 kHz signal, set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01,
LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). For measurements of a 10 kHz signal, set the HP
3458A to DCV, NPLC = .001, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .00002 for measuring the topline, and the DELAY to .00007 for measuring the baseline.
2. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step. Note that in the EDGE function, the topline is very near 0
V, and the baseline is a negative voltage. See Table 6-24.
3. For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to enter the average or mean value. See “Setup for SC600 Edge and
Wave Generator Measurements” for more details.
4. The peak-to-peak value of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance. Record each reading as indicated in Table 6-24.
6
Calibrator
Mainframe Edge
Output
HP 3458A
Range
Table 6-24. Edge Amplification Verification
Baseline
Reading
Peak-to-
Peak
100 mV, 1 kHz 100 mV dc
1.00V, 1 kHz 1 V dc
5 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
10 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
25 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
50 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
100 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
500 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
1.00 V, 10 kHz 1 V dc
2.5 V, 10 kHz 10 V dc
Topline
Reading
Peak-to-
Peak x
Correction
Tolerance
(
±
V)
0.0022
0.0202
0.0003
0.0004
0.0007
0.0012
0.0022
0.0102
0.0202
0.0502
6-52.
Edge Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM
9691)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
6-35
5500A
Service Manual
Refer to Figure 6-6 for proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify Edge frequency.
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.5 V at each frequency listed in Table
6-25.
4. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-25. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 6-25.
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 2.5 V p-p)
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
Table 6-25. Edge Frequency Verification
PM 6680 Reading (Frequency)
0.0025 Hz
0.025 Hz
0.25 Hz
2.5 Hz
25 Hz
Tolerance
6-53.
Edge Duty Cycle Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-6 for proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify Edge duty cycle.
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure duty cycle on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.5 V at 1 MHz.
4. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize. Compare the duty cycle reading to 50%
±
5%.
6-54.
Edge Rise Time Verification
This procedure tests the edge function’s rise time. Aberrations are also checked with the
Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope and SD-22/26 sampling head.
The following equipment is used to verify the edge rise time.
•
High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix SD-
22/26 sampling head
6-36
SC600 Option
Verification
6
•
3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
•
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
•
second BNC cable
Connect the BNC cable supplied with the SC600 to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to one BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter then to the DSO’s sampling head through the 3 dB attenuator.
Using the second BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter and BNC cable, connect the Calibrator
Mainframe’s TRIG OUT connector to the 11801’s Trigger Input. Refer to Figure 6-7.
Tek 11801
With 5D26 Sampling Head
5500A-SC600
5500A CALIBRATOR
3 dB Attenaator
3.5 mm (m/f)
SC600
Cable
NORMAL AUX
V, , A, -SENSE,
RTD AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
BNC(F) to
3.5 mm (m)
Adapter om058f.eps
Figure 6-7. Edge Rise Time Verification Setup
The Calibrator Mainframe should be in SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Press the softkey under TRIG to select the TRIG/1 External Trigger output. Program the Calibrator
Mainframe to output 250 mV @ 1 kHz. Set the DSO to these parameters:
Digital Storage Oscilloscope Setup
Main Time Base position (initial)
Horizontal scale
Measurement Function
40 ns
500 ps/div
Rise Time
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage and frequency listed in Table
6-26. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2. Change the vertical scale of the DSO to the value listed in the table. Adjust the main time base position and vertical offset until the edge signal is centered on the display.
Record the rise time measurement in column A of Table 6-26.
6-37
5500A
Service Manual
3. Correct the rise time measurement by accounting for the SD-22/26 sampling head’s rise time. The SD-22/26 rise time is specified as <28 ps. Column B = sqrt((Column
A)
2
- (SD-22/26 rise time)
2
).
4. The edge rise time measured should be less than the time indicated in Table 6-26.
90%
Rise time measures between these two points
10% om033i.eps
Figure 6-8. Edge Rise Time
Table 6-26. Edge Rise Time Verification
Calibrator Mainframe Output
Voltage
250 mV
250 mV
500 mV
500 mV
1 V
1 V
2.5 V
2.5 V
1 MHz
Frequency
10 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
DSO
Vertical
Axis
(mV/div)
20.0
20.0
50.0
50.0
100.0
100.0
200.0
200.0
A
11801
Reading
B
Corrected
Reading Tolerance
<300 ps
<350 ps
<300 ps
<350 ps
<300 ps
<350 ps
<300 ps
<350 ps
6-55.
Edge Abberation Verification
The following equipment is needed for this procedure:
•
Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope with SD22/26 sampling head
•
Output cable provided with the SC600
Before you begin this procedure, verify that the 5500A-SC600 is in the edge mode (the
Edge menu is displayed), and program it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz. Press O to activate the output.
6-38
SC600 Option
Verification
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the oscilloscope refering to Figure 6-7. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 10 mV/div and horizontal to 1 ns/div. Set the oscilloscope to look at the 90% point of the edge signal; use this point as the reference level. Set the oscilloscope to look at the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
With these settings, each vertical line on the oscilloscope represents a 1% aberration.
Determine that the SC600 falls within the typical specifications shown in Table 6-27.
Table 6-27. Edge Aberrations
0 - 2 ns
2 - 5 ns
5 - 15 ns
>15 ns
Time from 50% of Rising Edge Typical Edge Aberrations
<32 mV (3.2%)
<22 mV (2.2%)
<12 mV (1.2%)
<7 mV (0.7%)
6-56.
Tunnel Diode Pulser Drive Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Set the Calibrator Mainframe in Scope Cal mode, Edge. Proceed with the following steps:
1. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. Refer to Figure 6-2 for the proper setup connections.
2. Activate the TD Pulser output by pushing the TDPULSE blue softkey. The output should now be at 80 V peak-to-peak, 100 kHz, STANDBY.
3. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .001, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .00012 for measuring the topline and DELAY to .00007 for measuring the baseline. Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the 100 V dc range.
4. Change the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency to 10 kHz. Push the operate key, and use the HP 3458A to measure the topline and baseline.
5. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline. Record these values in Table 6-28, and compare against the listed tolerance.
Calibrator
Mainframe
Edge Output
80 V, 10 kHz
Table 6-28. Tunnel Diode Pulser Amplitude Verification
HP 3458A
Range
Topline
Reading
Baseline
Reading
Peak-to-Peak Tolerance
(
±
V)
100 V dc 1.6
6
6-39
5500A
Service Manual
6-57.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-17 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display.
Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave amplitude.
1. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-29.
4. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A’s rms reading for each voltage listed in Table 6-29.
5. Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor of 2.8284 to convert it to the peakto-peak value.
6. Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance column.
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 50 kHz)
Table 6-29. Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification
5790A Reading
(V rms)
5790A Reading x
2.8284 (V p-p)
V p-p value x correction
Tolerance
(V p-p)
µ
V
498
µ
V
800
6-40
SC600 Option
Verification
6-58.
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input
(Option PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM 9691)
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-6 for the proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave amplitude.
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and 50
Ω
impedance.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the PM 6680 at the channel indicated in Table 6-30. You will need the BNC-N adapter for the connection to Channel C.
3. Set the filter on the PM 6680 as indicated in the table.
4. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output as listed in Table 6-30. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
5. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-30.
6
Table 6-30. Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
PM 6680 Settings PM 6680 Reading Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 5.5 V p-p)
50 kHz
500 kHz
5 MHz
50 MHz
500 MHz
A
A
A
A
Channel
C
Filter
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
(Frequency)
Tolerance
0.125 Hz
1.25 Hz
12.5 Hz
125 Hz
1250 Hz
6-41
5500A
Service Manual
6-59.
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 8590A Spectrum Analyzer
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-9 for proper setup connections.
HP 8590 5500A-SC600
5500A CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to Type N (M)
Adapter
SC600
Cable
NORMAL AUX
V, , A, -SENSE,
AUX V
RTD
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX om059f.eps
Figure 6-9. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display.
Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave harmonics.
1. Using the BNC cable and BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP 8590A.
2. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to 5.5 V p-p at each frequency listed in Table 6-
31. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3. Set HP 8590A start frequency to the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency. Set HP
8590A stop frequency to 10 times the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency. Set the HP 8590A reference level at +19 dBm.
4. Record the harmonic level reading for each frequency and harmonic listed in Table 6-
31. For harmonics 3, 4, and 5, record the highest harmonic level of the three measured. Harmonics should be below the levels listed in the tolerance column of
Table 6-31.
6-42
Calibrator Mainframe
Output Frequency
(@ 5.5 V p-p)
1 MHz
2 MHz
2 MHz
4 MHz
4 MHz
8 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
20 MHz
40 MHz
40 MHz
50 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
200 kHz
200 kHz
400 kHz
400 kHz
800 kHz
800 kHz
1 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
200 MHz
400 MHz
400 MHz
600 MHz
600 MHz
Table 6-31. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
Harmonic HP 8590A Reading (dB)
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-46 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
Tolerance
SC600 Option
Verification
6
6-43
5500A
Service Manual
6-60.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification
Leveled Sine Wave flatness verification is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to
10 MHz (low frequency) and >10 MHz to 600 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Leveled Sine Wave flatness is measured relative to 50 kHz. This is determined directly in the low frequency band. The high frequency band requires a “transfer” measurement be made at 10 MHz to calculate a flatness relative to
50 kHz.
6-61.
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness
All low frequency flatness procedures use the following equipment.
•
5790A/03 AC Measurement Standard with Wideband option
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the 5790A WIDEBAND input with the BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter as shown in Figure 6-10. Set the 5790A to
AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi Res on.
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
10V PEAK
MAX
INPUT1 INPUT1 INPUT1 SHUNT INPUT1
2.2 mV
6
7 mV
0
2.2 mV
22 mV
7
220 mV
8
70 mV
1
700 mV
2
2.2 V
9
3 4
22 V .
220 mV
+/-
5
1kV
ENTER
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
DELETE
CLEAR
AUTO MAN
VIEW
REF
UTIL
MENUS
SPEC
POWER
I
O
5500A CALIBRATOR
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
LO
1V PK
MAX
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
TC
STBY
7
4
1
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
8
5
2
9
6
3
µ m n k p
M dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU
F sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
0 •
SHIFT
ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O om034f.eps
Figure 6-10. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard
6-62.
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness
All high frequency flatness procedures use the following equipment.
•
Hewlett-Packard E4418A Power Meter
•
Hewlett-Packard 8482A and 8481D Power Sensors
•
BNC(f) to Type N(f) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
Note
When high frequencies at voltages below 63 mV p-p are verified, use the
8481D Power Sensor. Otherwise, use the 8482A Power Sensor.
6-44
SC600 Option
Verification
6
Connect the HP E4418A Power Meter to either the 8482A or the 8481D Power Sensor as shown in Figure 6-11. For more information on connecting the two instruments, see the power meter and power sensor operators manuals.
Connect the power meter/power sensor combination to the SCOPE connector on the
Calibrator Mainframe, as shown in Figure 6-12.
The Hewlett-Packard E4418A Power Meter must be configured by setting the parameters listed below. Zero and self-calibrate the power meter with the power sensor being used.
Refer to the Hewlett-Packard E4418A operators manual for details.
•
PRESET
•
RESOLN 3
•
AUTO FILTER
•
WATTS
•
SENSOR TABLE 0 (default) om035f.eps
Figure 6-11. Connecting the HP E4418A Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D Power Sensor
5500A CALIBRATOR
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
LO
1V PK
MAX
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
TC
STBY
7
4
1
OPR
8
5
EARTH SCOPE
9
6 n m k p
M
BOOST dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
2
0
3
•
SHIFT
ENTER
F
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O om036f.eps
Figure 6-12. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor
6-45
5500A
Service Manual
6-63.
Low Frequency Verification
This procedure provides an example of testing low frequency flatness using a 5.5 V output. Follow the same procedure for testing other amplitudes, only compare results against the flatness specification listed in Table 6-32.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 500 kHz. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize. The 5790A should display approximately 1.94
V rms. Enter the 5790A reading in Column A of Table 6-32.
3. Enter 50 kHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the 5790A reading in Column B of Table 6-32.
4. Enter the next frequency listed in Table 6-32. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the reading into Column A of the table.
5. Enter 50 kHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the 5790A reading in Column B of Table 6-32.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of frequencies listed in Table 6-32. Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7. When you have completed Columns A and B, press Y to remove the Calibrator
Mainframe’s output. Complete Table 6-32 by performing the calculations for column
C. Compare Column C to the specifications listed in the final column.
Calibrator
Mainframe
Frequency
500 kHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
5 MHz
10 MHz
Table 6-32. Low Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
A B C
50 kHz
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Specification (%)
±
1.50
±
1.50
±
1.50
±
1.50
±
1.50
Complete Columns A-C as follows:
A Enter 5790A Reading (mV) for the present frequency.
B Enter 5790A Reading (mV) for 50 kHz.
C Compute and enter the Calibrator Mainframe Flatness Deviation (%): 100 * ((Column A entry)-
(Column B entry))/ (Column B entry)
6-64.
High Frequency Verification
This procedure provides an example of testing high frequency flatness using a 5.5 V output. Follow the same procedure for testing other amplitudes, only compare results against the flatness specification listed in Table 6-33. For this voltage range, you will use the model HP 8482A power sensor.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 30 MHz. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize. The power meter should display approximately 75 mW. Enter the power meter’s reading in Column A of Table 6-33.
6-46
SC600 Option
Verification
3. Enter 10 MHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize, then enter the power meter’s reading in Column B of Table 6-33.
4. Enter the next frequency listed in Table 6-33. Allow the power meter’s reading to stabilize, then enter the reading into Column A of the table.
5. Enter 10 MHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize, then enter the power meter’s reading in Column B of Table 6-33.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of frequencies listed in Table 6-33. Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7. When you have completed Columns A and B, press Y to remove the Calibrator
Mainframe’s output. Complete Table 6-33 by performing the calculations for each column. Compare Column E to the specifications listed in the final column.
Table 6-33. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
30
70
±
1.50
±
1.50
120
±
2.00
290
±
2.00
360
±
4.00
390
±
4.00
400
±
4.00
480
±
4.00
570
±
4.00
580
±
4.00
590
±
4.00
600
±
4.00
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A
B
Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C
D
E
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column
D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6
6-47
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-34. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 7.5 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
30
70
±
1.50
±
1.50
120
±
2.00
290
±
2.00
360
±
4.00
390
±
4.00
400
±
4.00
480
±
4.00
570
±
4.00
580
±
4.00
590
±
4.00
600
±
4.00
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
B
C
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D
E
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
Table 6-35. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 25 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
30
70
±
1.50
±
1.50
120
±
2.00
290
±
2.00
360
±
4.00
390
±
4.00
400
±
4.00
480
±
4.00
570
±
4.00
580
±
4.00
590
±
4.00
600
±
4.00
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
B
C
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
E
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6-48
SC600 Option
Verification
Table 6-36. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 70 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
30
70
±
1.50
±
1.50
120
±
2.00
290
±
2.00
360
±
4.00
390
±
4.00
400
±
4.00
480
±
4.00
570
±
4.00
580
±
4.00
590
±
4.00
600
±
4.00
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
B Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D
E
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column
D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
Table 6-37. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 250 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
30
70
±
1.50
±
1.50
120
±
2.00
290
±
2.00
360
±
4.00
390
±
4.00
400
±
4.00
480
±
4.00
570
±
4.00
580
±
4.00
590
±
4.00
600
±
4.00
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
B Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
E Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6
6-49
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-38. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 800 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
30
70
±
1.50
±
1.50
120
±
2.00
290
±
2.00
360
±
4.00
390
±
4.00
400
±
4.00
480
±
4.00
570
±
4.00
580
±
4.00
590
±
4.00
600
±
4.00
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W). B
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D
E
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
Table 6-39. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 3.4 V
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
30
70
120
290
360
390
400
480
570
580
590
600
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
±
1.50
±
1.50
±
2.00
±
2.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W). B
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D
E
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6-50
SC600 Option
Verification
6-65.
Time Marker Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input
(Option PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM 9691)
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-6 for the proper setup connections. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and
50
Ω
impedance.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Marker menu on the display.
Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to for each period listed in Table 6-40.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to the output as listed in Table 6-40.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the PM 6680 at the channel indicated in Table 6-40. You will need the BNC-N adapter for the connection to Channel C.
3. Set the filter on the PM 6680 as indicated in the table. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed for the
Calibrator Mainframe.
4. Invert the PM 6680’s frequency reading to derive the period. For example, a reading of 1.000006345 kHz has a period of:
1/1.000006345 kHz = 0.999993655 ms.
Record the period in the table and compare to the tolerance column.
6
Calibrator
Mainframe
4.979 s
2.002 s
50.0 ms
20.0 ms
Table 6-40. Time Marker Verification
PM 6680 Settings PM 6680
Reading
1
PM 6680 Reading
(Period)
Tolerance
A
A
A
A
On
On
Off
Off
10.0 ms A Off
50.0
µ s A
20.0
µ s A
10.0
µ s A
50.0 ns A Off
20.0 ns
10.0 ns
5.00 ns
2.00 ns
A
A
A
C
Off
Off
Off
Off
24.91E-3 s
4.06E-3 s
3.75E-6 s
50E-09 s
25E-09 s
125E-15 s
50E-15 s
25E-15 s
12.5E-15 s
5E-15 s
6-51
5500A
Service Manual
6-66.
Wave Generator Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
5500A-SC600
5500A CALIBRATOR
SC600
Cable
NORMAL AUX
V, , A, -SENSE,
RTD AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
BNC (F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50
Ω
Feed Through
Termination om060f.eps
Figure 6-13. Wave Generator Verification Setup
For wave generation verification procedures, refer to Figure 6-13 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Wavegen menu on the display.
Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Set the offset to 0 mV, and the frequency to 1 kHz. Then follow these steps to verify the wave generator function.
6-67.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
Set the Calibrator Mainframe impedance to 1 M
Ω
(The blue softkey under SCOPE Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double
Banana adapter.
2. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the wave type and voltage listed in
Table 6-41.
4. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A rms reading for each wave type and voltage in Table 6-41.
6-52
SC600 Option
Verification
5. Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor listed to convert it to the peak-topeak value. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-68.
Verification at 50
Ω
Set the Calibrator Mainframe impedance to 50
Ω
(The blue softkey under SCOPE Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the wave type and voltage listed in
Table 6-42.
4. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A rms reading for each wave type and voltage in Table 6-42.
5. Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor listed to convert it to the peak-topeak value.
Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6
6-53
5500A
Service Manual
square square square square square square square square sine sine sine sine sine square square square square square square square square square square sine sine triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle
Calibrator
Mainframe
Wave Type
Table 6-41. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 10 kHz)
5790A
Reading
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A Reading x
Conversion Factor
(V p-p)
560 mV
899 mV
0.90 V
3.75 V
6.59 V
6.6 V
30.8 V
55.0 V
1.8 mV
21.9 mV
89.9 mV
219 mV
899 mV
1.8 mV
11.9 mV
21.9 mV
22.0 mV
56.0 mV
89.9 mV
90 mV
155 mV
219 mV
220 mV
6.59 V
55 V
1.8 mV
21.9 mV
89.9 mV
219 mV
899 mV
6.59 V
55 V
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.8284
2.8284
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
Tolerance
(V p-p)
0.000154 V
0.000457 V
0.00075 V
0.00076 V
0.00178 V
0.002797 V
0.0028 V
0.00475 V
0.00667 V
0.0067 V
0.0169 V
0.02707 V
0.0271 V
0.1126 V
0.1978 V
0.1981 V
0.9241 V
1.6501 V
0.000154 V
0.000757 V
0.002797 V
0.00667 V
0.02707 V
0.1978 V
1.6501 V
0.000154 V
0.000757 V
0.002797 V
0.00667 V
0.02707 V
0.1978 V
1.6501 V
6-54
Calibrator
Mainframe
Wave
Type
Calibrator
Table 6-42. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω
Mainframe Reading output
(10 kHz)
5790A
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A Rdg x
Conversion
Factor (V p-p)
V p-p value x correction
square square square square square square square square square square
1.8 mV
6.4 mV
10.9 mV
11.0 mV
28.0 mV
44.9 mV
45 mV
78 mV
109 mV
110 mV
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000 square square square square square square
280 mV
449 mV
450 mV
780 mV
1.09 V
1.10 V
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000 square square
1.80 V
2.50 V
2.0000
2.0000 sine 1.8 2.8284 sine 109 sine 449 triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle
1.8 mV
10.9 mV
44.9 mV
109 mV
449 mV
1.09 V
2.50 V
2.8284
2.8284
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
SC600 Option
Verification
Tolerance
(V p-p)
0.000154 V
0.000292 V
0.000427 V
0.00043 V
0.00094 V
0.001447 V
0.00145 V
0.00244 V
0.00337 V
0.0034 V
0.0085 V
0.01357 V
0.0136 V
0.0235 V
0.0328 V
0.0331 V
0.0541 V
0.0751 V
0.000154 V
0.000427 V
0.001447 V
0.00337 V
0.01357 V
0.0328 V
0.0751 V
6
6-55
5500A
Service Manual
6-69.
Pulse Width Verification
The following equipment is used to verify the pulse width.
•
High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix SD-
22/26 sampling head
•
3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
•
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
•
second BNC cable
Refer to Figure 6-7 for proper setup connections.
Connect the BNC cable supplied with the SC600 to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to one BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter then to the DSO’s sampling head through the 3 dB attenuator.
Using the second BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter and BNC cable, connect the Calibrator
Mainframe’s TRIG OUT connector to the 11801’s Trigger Input. The Calibrator
Mainframe should be in SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Press the softkey under TRIG to select the TRIG/1 External Trigger output.
Set the DSO to these parameters:
Digital Storage Oscilloscope Setup
Main Time Base position (initial)
Vertical scale
Trigger
40 ns
200 mV/div source = ext; level = 0.5 V; ext atten = x10; slope = +; mode = auto
Measurement Function positive width
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the pulse width and period at 2.5 V as listed in Table 6-43.
2. Change the horizontal scale of the DSO to the value listed in the table. Adjust the main time base position and vertical offset until the pulse signal is centered on the display. Record the width measurement. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 6-
43.
Table 6-43. Pulse Width Verification
Calibrator Output
DSO horizontal scale
Width Period
(time/div)
4.0 ns
4 ns
4 ns
40 ns
2E-6
2E-5
2E-4
2E-3
1 ns
1 ns
1 ns
10 ns
11801
Reading
Tolerance
2.2 ns
2.2 ns
2.2 ns
4 ns
6-56
SC600 Option
Verification
6-70.
Pulse Period Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM
9691)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-6 for the proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Pulse menu on the display. Press O on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify the Pulse period.
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure period on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the pulse width and period (at 2.5 V) as listed in Table 6-44.
4. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each period listed for the Calibrator Mainframe. Compare to the tolerance column of Table
6-44.
6
Calibrator Mainframe
Output
Table 6-44. Pulse Period Verification
PM 6680 Reading
Width Period (Period) Tolerance
80 ns
500 ns
500 ns
200 ns
10 ms
20 ms
5E-13 s
2.5E-08 s
5.0E-08 s
6-71.
MeasZ Resistance Verification
The MeasZ resistance function is verified by measuring resistors of known values. The measurement value is then compared to the resistor actual value.
The resistors must make a solid connection to a BNC(f) to enable a connection to the end of the BNC cable supplied with the SC600. The resistance values must be known at this
BNC(f) connector. Fluke uses an HP 3458A DMM to make a 4-wire ohms measurement at the BNC(f) connector to determine the actual resistance values.
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Resistors of known values: 1.5 M
Ω
, 1 M
Ω
, 60
Ω
, 50
Ω
, 40
Ω
nominal
•
adapters to connect resistors to BNC(f) connector
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-17 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the MeasZ menu on the display.
Then follow these steps to verify the MeasZ resistance function.
1. Set the Calibrator Mainframe MeasZ resistance range as indicated in Table 6-45.
(The blue softkey under MEASURE toggles the MeasZ ranges).
6-57
5500A
Service Manual
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector to the BNC(f) connector attached to the nominal resistance values indicated in Table 6-45. The 600 K
Ω nominal value can be achieved by connecting the 1.5 M
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
resistors in parallel.
3. Allow the Calibrator Mainframe reading to stabilize, then record the Calibrator
Mainframe resistance reading for each nominal value listed in Table 6-45. Compare the Calibrator Mainframe resistance readings to the actual resistance values and the tolerance column of Table 6-45.
Calibrator
Mainframe
MeasZ
Range
Nominal
Table 6-45. MeasZ Resistance Verification
Resistance
Value
Calibrator
Mainframe
Resistance
Reading
res 50
Ω
40 res 50
Ω
50 res 50
Ω
60 res 1M
Ω
600 res 1M
Ω
1 res 1M
Ω
1.5
Actual
Resistance
Value
Tolerance
6-72.
MeasZ Capacitance Verification
The MeasZ capacitance function is verified by measuring capacitors of known values.
The measurement value is then compared to the capacitor actual value.
The capacitors must make a solid connection to a BNC(f) to enable a connection to the end of the BNC cable supplied with the SC600. Due to the small capacitance values, care must be taken to know the actual capacitance at this BNC(f) connector. The capacitance values must be determined at a 10 MHz oscillator frequency. Fluke uses an HP 4192A
Impedance Analyzer at 10 MHz to determine the actual capacitance values.
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Adapters and capacitors to achieve 5 pF, 29 pF, 49 pF nominal values at the end of
BNC(f) connector
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-17 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the MeasZ menu on the display.
Then follow these steps to verify the MeasZ capacitance function.
1. Set the Calibrator Mainframe MeasZ capacitance range to cap. (The blue softkey under MEASURE toggles the MeasZ ranges).
2. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector, but do not connect any thing to the end of this cable.
3. Allow the Calibrator Mainframe reading to stabilize, then press the SET OFFSET blue softkey to zero the capacitance reading.
4. Connect the end of the BNC cable to the BNC(f) connector attached to the nominal capacitor values indicated in Table 6-46.
6-58
SC600 Option
Verification
5. Allow the Calibrator Mainframe reading to stabilize, then record the Calibrator
Mainframe capacitance reading for each nominal value listed in Table 6-46. Compare the Calibrator Mainframe capacitance readings to the actual capacitance values and the tolerance column of Table 6-46.
Nominal
Capacitance Value
5 pF
29 pF
49 pF
Table 6-46. MeasZ Capacitance Verification
Calibrator
Mainframe
Capacitance
Reading
Actual Capacitance
Value
0.75 pF
1.95 pF
2.95 pF
Tolerance
6-73.
Overload Function Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
Refer to Figure 6-14 for setup connections.
6
5500A-SC600
5500A CALIBRATOR
SC600 Cable
50
Ω
Feedthrough
Termination
NORMAL AUX
V, , A, -SENSE,
RTD AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
Figure 6-14. Overload Function Verification Setup
om061f.eps
6-59
5500A
Service Manual
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Overload menu on the display.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector. Then follow these steps to verify the overload function.
1. Connect the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination to the end of the BNC cable.
2. Program the Calibrator Mainframe output for 5.000 V, DC (OUT VAL blue softkey), and time limit = 60 s (T LIMIT blue softkey).
3. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output and verify that the
OPR display timer increments.
4. Remove the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination before 60 seconds and verify that
Calibrator Mainframe goes to STBY.
5. Reconnect the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination to the end of the BNC cable.
6. Program the Calibrator Mainframe output for 5.000 V, AC (OUT VAL blue softkey).
7. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output and verify that the
OPR display timer increments.
8. Remove the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination before 60 seconds and verify that
Calibrator Mainframe goes to STBY.
6-74.
SC600 Hardware Adjustments
Hardware adjustments must be made to the leveled sine and edge functions each time the
SC600 is repaired. In addition to the adjustment procedures, this section provides lists of the required equipment and some recommendations on models that have the capabilities required by these procedures. Equivalent models can be substituted if necessary.
6-75.
Equipment Required
The following equipment is necessary for performing the hardware adjustments described in this section. The models listed are recommended for providing accurate results.
•
Standard adjustment tool for adjusting the pots and trimmer caps
•
Extender Card
•
Oscilloscope Mainframe and Sampling Head (Tektronix 11801 with SD-22/26 or
Tektronix TDS 820 with 8 GHz bandwidth)
•
10 dB Attenuator (Weinschel 9-10 (SMA), or Weinschel 18W-10, or equivalent)
•
Cable provided with SC600
•
Spectrum Analyzer (Hewlett-Packard 8590A)
6-76.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function
There are two adjustment procedures that need to be made for the leveled sine wave function. The first procedure adjusts the balance out of the LO VCO so that the signal is balanced between the two VCOs. The second procedure adjusts the harmonics.
6-77.
Equipment Setup
This procedure uses the spectrum analyzer. Before you begin this procedure, verify that the Calibrator Mainframe is in leveled sine wave mode (the Levsine menu is displayed), and program it to output 5.5 V p-p @ 600 MHz. Press O to activate the output.
6-60
SC600 Option
SC600 Hardware Adjustments
Refer to Figure 6-9 for setup connections and connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the
Spectrum Analyzer. Adjust the Spectrum Analyzer so that it displays one peak across its horizontal center line. The far right of the peak is fixed at the far right of the center line, as shown below.
6-78.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance
Once you have completed the setup described above, perform the following procedure to adjust the VCO balance for the leveled sine wave function.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 600 MHz.
2. Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
10 MHz
800 MHz
30 kHz
3 kHz
Reference Level 20 dBm
The Spectrum Analyzer will display a spur at 153 MHz. Refer to Figure 6-15 to identify the spur.
3. You need to adjust the wave until the spur is at a minimum. To do this, slowly rotate
R1 (shown in the diagram) counterclockwise until the spur is at a minimum. As you adjust it, the spur will move down the waveform, towards the right. As soon as the spur is minimized, stop rotating R1. If you rotate it too far, the spur will reappear.
Once you have turned R1 to the point at which the spur is at a minimum, the signal is balanced between the VCOs, and you have completed the adjustment.
6
R1
Figure 6-15. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Balance
6-79.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
The following procedure adjusts the harmonics for the leveled sine wave function. om052f.eps
6-61
5500A
Service Manual
Note
This procedure should only be used for adjusting the leveled sine wave harmonics. Do not use this procedure as a verification test. The specifications in this procedure are not valid for verification.
1. Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
50 MHz
500 MHz
3 MHz
3 kHz
Reference Level 20 dBm
2. Use your Spectrum Analyzer’s Peak Search function to find the desired reference signal. The Analyzer should show the fundamental, and second and third harmonics.
The harmonics need to be adjusted so that the second harmonic is at 40 dBc and third harmonic should typically be at 50 dBc as shown in Figure 6-16.
3. To adjust the harmonics, adjust R8, as shown in Figure 6-16 until the peaks of the second and third harmonic are at the correct dB level. You may find that you can place the second harmonic at 40 dBc but the third harmonic is not at 50 dBc. If this is the case, continue adjusting R8. The second harmonic will fluctuate, but there is a point at which both harmonics will be at the correct decibel level.
40 dBc
50 dBc
R8
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic
Figure 6-16. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
6-80.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function
Adjustments need to be made after repair to the edge function to adjust the edge aberrations. om051f.eps
6-62
SC600 Option
SC600 Hardware Adjustments
Note
To verify the edge aberrations back to national standards, you should send your Calibrator Mainframe to Fluke, or other facility that has established traceability for aberrations. Fluke, for example, has a reference pulse that is sent to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) for characterization. This information is then transferred to high speed sampling heads, which are used to adjust and verify the SC600.
6-81.
Equipment Setup
The following equipment is needed for this procedure:
•
Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with SD22/26 input module or Tektronix TDS 820 with 8 GHz bandwidth.
•
10 dB Attenuator: Weinschel 9-10 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-10 or equivalent
•
Output cable provided with the SC600
Before you begin this procedure, verify that the SC600 is in the edge mode (the Edge menu is displayed), and program it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz. Press O to activate the output.
Refer to Figure 6-7 for the proper setup connections and connect the Calibrator
Mainframe to the oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 10 mV/div and horizontal to 1 ns/div. Set the oscilloscope to look at the 90% point of the edge signal; use this point as the reference level. Set the oscilloscope to look at the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
6-82.
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations
Refer to Figure 6-17 while making the following adjustments:
1. Adjust A90R13 to set the edge signal at the right edge of oscilloscope display, at 10 ns, to the reference level set above.
2. Adjust A90R36 so the first overshoot is the same amplitude as the next highest aberration.
3. Adjust A90R35 so that the second and third overshoot aberrations are the same amplitude as the first aberration.
4. Adjust A90R12 to set the edge signal occurring between 2 ns and 10 ns to the reference level set above.
5. Readjust A90R36 and A90R35 to obtain equal amplitudes for the first, second, and third aberrations.
6. Adjust A90R13 to set the edge signal occurring between 0 ns and 2 ns to the reference point set above. Center any aberrations so the peaks are equal above and below the reference level.
7. Readjust A90R12 if necessary to keep the edge signal occurring between 2 ns and 10 ns at the reference level.
8. Readjust A90R13 if necessary to keep the edge signal occurring between 0 ns and 2 ns at the reference level.
9. Set the UUT output to 250 mV and the oscilloscope vertical to 2 mV/div. Check the aberrations.
10. Connect the 10 dB attenuator to the oscilloscope input. Connect the UUT to the attenuator and program the UUT output to 2.5 V.
6
6-63
5500A
Service Manual
11. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 5 mV/div. Check the aberrations.
12. Check for rise time <300 ps at 250 mV, 1 V, and 2.5 V outputs.
1st Aberration
2nd Aberration
3rd Aberration
T
R36
R12
R13
R35
Figure 6-17. Adjusting Edge Aberrations
om050f.eps
6-64
Chapter 6
SC300 Option
6-83.
6-84.
6-85.
6-86.
Voltage Function Specifications....................................................... 6-68
6-87.
Edge Function Specifications ........................................................... 6-69
6-88.
Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications .................................... 6-70
6-89.
Time Marker Function Specifications .............................................. 6-71
6-90.
Wave Generator Specifications ........................................................ 6-71
6-91.
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function .......... 6-72
6-92.
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function ....................... 6-72
6-93.
6-94.
6-95.
6-96.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode ................................................................ 6-72
6-97.
Time Marker Mode........................................................................... 6-72
6-98.
Wave Generator Mode ..................................................................... 6-73
6-99.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.......................... 6-75
6-100.
SC300 Calibration Setup ...................................................................... 6-77
6-101.
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions...................... 6-78
6-102.
Overview of HP3458A Operation .................................................... 6-78
6-103.
Setup for Square Wave Measurements............................................. 6-78
6-104.
DC Voltage Calibration.................................................................... 6-79
6-105.
AC Square Wave Voltage Calibration.............................................. 6-80
6-106.
Edge Amplitude Calibration............................................................. 6-81
6-107.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration...................................... 6-81
6-108.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration.......................................... 6-82
6-109.
6-110.
Low Frequency Calibration.......................................................... 6-83
High Frequency Calibration......................................................... 6-83
6-111.
6-112.
DC Voltage Verification................................................................... 6-84
6-113.
6-114.
6-115.
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification................................................. 6-87
6-116.
6-117.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-84
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-84
Verification at 1 M
Verification at 50
Ω
Ω
.................................................................... 6-87
..................................................................... 6-89
6-65
5500A
Service Manual
6-118.
AC Voltage Frequency Verification................................................. 6-90
6-119.
Edge Amplitude Verification ........................................................... 6-91
6-120.
Edge Frequency Verification............................................................ 6-92
6-121.
Edge Duty Cycle Verification .......................................................... 6-93
6-122.
Edge Rise Time Verification ............................................................ 6-93
6-123.
Edge Abberation Verification........................................................... 6-95
6-124.
Leveled Sine Wave Reference Verification ..................................... 6-96
6-125.
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification..................................... 6-97
6-126.
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification .................................... 6-98
6-127.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification ........................................ 6-100
6-128.
6-129.
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness ............................ 6-100
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness............................ 6-100
Low Frequency Verification ........................................................ 6-102
High Frequency Verification........................................................ 6-102
6-130.
6-131.
6-132.
Time Marker Verification................................................................. 6-107
6-133.
Wave Generator Verification............................................................ 6-108
6-134.
6-135.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-109
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-109
6-136.
SC300 Hardware Adjustments.............................................................. 6-111
6-137.
Equipment Required......................................................................... 6-112
6-138.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function ..................................... 6-112
6-139.
6-140.
6-141.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function............................. 6-113
6-142.
6-143.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-112
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ............................. 6-112
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-113
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations ................................................... 6-113
6-144.
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board.................................. 6-115
6-145.
Equipment Required......................................................................... 6-115
6-146.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function ..................................... 6-115
6-147.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-115
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance......................... 6-115
6-148.
6-149.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ............................. 6-116
6-150.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function............................. 6-117
6-151.
6-152.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-117
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations for Board 5500A-4004-1 .......... 6-118
6-153.
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations for Board 5500A-4004 ............. 6-120
6-154.
Adjusting the Rise Time for the Edge Function ............................... 6-122
6-155.
6-156.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-122
Adjusting the Edge Rise Time ..................................................... 6-122
6-66
SC300 Option
Introduction
6
6-83.
Introduction
This chapter contains the following information and service procedures for the
SC300 Oscilloscope Calibration Option functions.
•
Specifications
•
Theory of Operation
•
Calibration Procedures
•
Verification Procedures
•
Hardware Adjustments made after Repair
The calibration and verification procedures provide traceable results for all of the SC300 functions as long as they are performed using the recommended equipment. All of the required equipment along with the minimum specifications, are provided in Table 6-41 under “Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.”
The calibration and verification procedures in this chapter are not the ones Fluke uses at the factory. These procedures have been developed to provide you with the ability to calibrate and verify the SC300 at your own site if necessary. You should review all of the procedures in advance to make sure you have the resources to complete them. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification.
Hardware adjustments that are made after repair, at the factory or designated Fluke service centers, are provided in detail.
6-84.
Maintenance
There are no maintenance techniques or diagnostic remote commands for the SC300 that are available to users. If your SC300 is not installed or not receiving power, the following error message appears on the display when you press calibration menus. a to access the oscilloscope om030i.eps
If this message is displayed, and you have the SC300 installed in your Calibrator
Mainframe, you must return the Calibrator Mainframe to Fluke for repair. If you wish to purchase the SC300, contact your Fluke sales representative.
6-67
5500A
Service Manual
6-85.
SC300 Specifications
These specifications apply only to the SC300. General specifications that apply to the
Calibrator Mainframe can be found in Chapter 1. The specifications are valid providing the Calibrator Mainframe is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1, and has completed a warm-up period of at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes. All SC300 specifications apply to the end of the cable (PN 945014) supplied with the Option.
6-86.
Voltage Function Specifications
Amplitude Characteristics
Range
Voltage Function
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
Sequence
DC Signal into 1 M
Ω
AC Square Wave Signal
Ω
into 1 M
Ω
0 V to
±
2.2 V 0 V to
±
33 V 1.8 mV to
2.2 V p-p
1.8 mV to
105 V p-p [1]
< 100 V: 4 digits or 10
µ
V, whichever is greater
≥
100 V: 5 digits
Continuous [1]
±
(0.25% of output + 100
µ
V) [2]
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
Square Wave Frequency Characteristics
Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
10 Hz to 10 kHz [3]
(25 ppm of setting + 15 mHz)
Typical Aberration within 20
µ s from leading edge < (2% of output + 100
µ
V)
[1] The square wave signal into 1 M
Ω
is a positive square wave from 1.8 mV to 55 V p-p. From 95 V to
105 V, its output is a square wave-like signal that alternates between the negative peak and the positive peak, with the centerline at –10 V. Signals between 55 V and 95 V p-p are not available.
[2] The uncertainty for 50
Ω
loads does not include the input impedance uncertainty of the oscilloscope. Square wave signals below 4.5 mV p-p have an uncertainty of
±
(0.25% of output +
200 µV). Signals from 95 to 105 V p-p have an uncertainty of 0.5% of output in the frequency range
100 Hz to 1 kHz. Typical uncertainty is 1.5% of output for 95 to 105 V p-p signals in the frequency range 10 Hz to 100 Hz, and 0.5% of output in the frequency range 1 kHz to 10 kHz.
[3] From 95 V to 105 V, the output is a square wave-type signal that alternates between the negative peak and the positive peak, with the centerline at –10 V. If the oscilloscope you are calibrating requires a fixed period for the square wave’s peak-to-peak amplitude, you may need to adjust the
Calibrator Mainframe’s frequency output to accommodate for this waveform. For example, the Fluke
ScopeMeter® has a calibration point at 1 kHz (1 ms), 100 V, peak-to-peak. To output a period of
1 ms at 100 V peak-to-peak, use a frequency of 356 Hz.
6-68
SC300 Option
SC300 Specifications
6
6-87.
Edge Function Specifications
Amplitude
Range (p-p)
Edge Characteristics into 50
Ω
4.5 mV to 2.75 V
Adjustment Range
Sequence
±
10% around each sequence value (indicated below)
5 mV, 10 mV, 25 mV, 50 mV,
100 mV, 250 mV, 500 mV, 1 V,
2.5 V
Other Edge Characteristics
Frequency Range
Rise Time
Leading Edge Aberrations
Typical Duty Cycle
1 kHz to 1 MHz
< 400 ps within 10 ns
10 to 30 ns after 30 ns
45% to 55%
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(2% of output + 200
µ
V)
±
(25 ppm of setting + 15 mHz)
< (3% of output + 2 mV)
< (1% of output + 2 mV)
< (0.5% of output + 2 mV)
6-69
5500A
Service Manual
6-88.
Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications
Frequency Range
Leveled Sine Wave
Characteristics into
50
Ω
Amplitude Characteristics
50 kHz Reference 50 kHz to 100 MHz 100 to 300 MHz [1]
Range (p-p)
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
Flatness (relative to 50 kHz)
±
(2% of output
+ 200
µ
V)
5 mV to 5.5 V [1]
< 100 mV: 3 digits
≥
100 mV: 4 digits continuously adjustable
±
(3.5% of output
+ 300
µ
V)
±
(4% of output
+ 300
µ
V) not applicable
±
(1.5% of output
+ 100
µ
V)
≤
1% [2]
±
(2.0% of output
+ 100
µ
V)
Short-term Stability
Frequency Characteristics
Resolution
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
Distortion Characteristics
±
10 Hz
(25 ppm + 15 mHz)
±
10 kHz [3]
25 ppm [4]
±
10 kHz
25 ppm
2nd Harmonic
3rd and Higher Harmonics
≤
-33 dBc
≤
-38 dBc
[1] Extended frequency range to 350 MHz is provided, but flatness is not specified. Amplitude is limited to 3 V for frequencies above 250 MHz.
[2] Within one hour after reference amplitude setting, provided temperature varies no more than
±
5°C.
[3] At frequencies below 120 kHz, the resolution is 10 Hz. For frequencies between 120 kHz and
999.9 kHz, the resolution is 100 Hz.
[4]
±
(25 ppm + 15 mHz) for frequencies of 1 MHz and below.
6-70
SC300 Option
SC300 Specifications
6
6-89.
Time Marker Function Specifications
Time Marker into
50
Ω
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C [3]
Wave Shape
±
(25 + t*1000) ppm [1] pulsed sawtooth
±
(25 + t* 15,000) ppm [1] pulsed sawtooth
Typical Output Level
Sequence (cardinal points)
Adjustment Range
±
25 ppm pulsed sawtooth
At least
±
10% around each cardinal points.
10 ns to 2 ns
±
25 ppm sine
> 1 V pk > 1 V pk > 1 V pk > 2 V p-p [2]
5-2-1 from 5 s to 2 ns (e.g., 500 ms, 200 ms, 100 ms)
[1] t is the time in seconds. Examples: At 5 s the uncertainty is 5,025 ppm; At 50
µ s the uncertainty is 25.75 ppm.
[2] The 2 ns time marker is typically > 0.5 V p-p.
[3] Away from the cardinal points, add
±
50 ppm to uncertainty.
6-90.
Wave Generator Specifications
Wave Generator Characteristics
Square Wave, Sine Wave, and Triangle Wave into 50
Ω
or 1 M
Ω
Amplitude
Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C,
10 Hz to 10 kHz into 1 M
Ω
: 1.8 mV to 55 V p-p into 50
Ω
: 1.8 mV to 2.2 V p-p
±
(3% of p-p output + 100 µV)
Sequence
Typical DC Offset Range
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
0 to
±
(
≥
40% of p-p amplitude) [1]
Frequency
Range 10 Hz to 100 kHz
Resolution
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency
±
(25 ppm + 15 mHz)
[1] The dc offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms.
6-71
5500A
Service Manual
6-91.
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function
Time Marker
Period
5 to 50 ms
20 ms to 100 ns
50 to 10 ns
5 to 2 ns
Division Ratio [1]
off/1 off/1/10/100 off/10/100 off/100
Amplitude into
50
Ω
(p-p)
≥
1 V
≥
1 V
≥
1 V
≥
1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤
2 ns
≤
2 ns
≤
2 ns
≤
2 ns
6-92.
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function
Edge Signal
Frequency
1 kHz to 1 MHz
Division Ratio
off/1
Amplitude into
50
Ω
(p-p)
≥
1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤
2 ns
6-93.
Theory of Operation
The following discussion provides a brief overview of the following SC300 operating modes: voltage, edge, leveled sine wave, time marker and wave generator. This discussion will allow you to identify which of the main plug-in boards of the Calibrator
Mainframe are defective. Figure 6-18 shows a block diagram of the SC300 Option, also referred to as the A50 board. Functions that are not depicted in the figure are generated from the DDS Assembly (A6 board). For a diagram of all Calibrator Mainframe board assemblies, refer to Figure 2-1.
6-94.
Voltage Mode
All signals for the voltage function are generated from the A6 board and are passed to the
A50 board via the SCOPE_HV signal line. The generated signal (ac or dc) is then passed from the A50 board to the A90, attenuator assembly, where range attenuation occurs. The signal is then passed to the SCOPE output BNC on the front panel.
6-95.
Edge Mode
The edge clock originates on the A50 board. The signal is then shaped and split to generate the fast edge and external trigger signals. The edge signal is passed from the
A50 board first to the attenuator assembly (where range attenuation occurs) and then to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
6-96.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode
All of the leveled sine wave signals (from 50 kHz to 350 MHz) are produced on the A50 board. The leveled sine wave signal is passed from the A50 board to the on-board attenuator assembly. The attenuator assembly provides range attenuation and also contains a power detector which maintains amplitude flatness across the frequency range.
The signal is then passed to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
6-97.
Time Marker Mode
There are several “ranges” of time marker operation: 5 s to 50 ms, 20 ms to 100 ns, 50 ns to 20 ns, 10 ns and 5 to 2 ns.
6-72
SC300 Option
Theory of Operation
6
The 5 s to 50 ms markers are generated on the A6 DDS board and are passed to the A50 board. The signal path is also split to drive the external trigger circuitry on the A50 board. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel. The marker signal passing through the A50 board is connected up to the attenuator assembly.
The signal is then passed to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The 20 ms to 2 ns markers are generated on the A50 board. From 20 ms to 100 ns, a 20% duty cycle square wave is produced in addition to the spike and square wave markers.
From 50 ns to 20 ns, only spike or square waves are produced. At 10 ns, the user can chose between the square wave or the leveled sine signal. The marker signal is passed from the A50 board to the attenuator assembly and then to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The trigger signal is also generated on the A50 board. If the trigger is turned on, the signal is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
6-98.
Wave Generator Mode
All signals for the wavegen function are generated from the A6 board and are passed to the A50 board. They are then sent to the attenuator assembly, where range attenuation occurs. Wavegen signals are then sent to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The Wave Generator Square Wave is identical to the AC Square Wave Voltage.
6-73
5500A
Service Manual
LF PWB
DDS
50
Ω
Time Mark
II
Analog Shaped
2
µ s - 10
µ s
Time Mark
III
Pulse Shaped
20
µ s - 1
µ s
LF Mux.
Trigger
÷1,10,100,1000
Oscilloscope
Calibrator
Trigger BNC
External
Clock In
Leveled Sine Wave and Time Mark
IV
Unleveled
Leveled
PLLs
Pwr Amp.
Leveling Loop
HF Mux.
HF PWB
Step Attenuator Module
SCOPE
Output BNC
HF Mux.
8dB,20dB,20dB pp detect
Level
Edge
10 MHz Clock om053f.eps
Figure 6-18. SC300 Block Diagram
6-74
SC300 Option
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
6
6-99.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
Table 6-47 lists the equipment, recommended models, and minimum specifications required for each calibration and verification procedure.
Table 6-47. SC300 Calibration and Verification Equipment
Instrument Model
Minimum Use Specifications
Wave Generator, Edge Amplitude Calibration, AC Voltage Verification
Digital
Multimeter
HP 3458A
Voltage
1.8 mV to
±
105 V p-p Uncertainty: 0.06%
Edge 4.5 mV to 2.75 V p-p Uncertainty: 0.06%
Termination
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Edge Rise Time and Aberrations Verification
High-
Frequency
Digital Storage
Oscilloscope
Attenuator
Tektronix 11801 with
Tektronix SD-22/26 sampling head, or
Tektronix TDS 820 with
8 GHz bandwidth
Weinschel 9-10 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-10 or equivalent
Resolution 4.5 mV to 2.75 V
10 dB, 3.5 mm (m/f)
Adapter
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m)
BNC Cable
Feedthrough
±
1% (used with Edge Amplitude
Calibration and AC Voltage Verification)
(supplied with SC300)
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration and Verification
Fluke 5790A
Range 5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
AC
Measurement
Standard
Termination
BNC Cable
Feedthrough
±
1%
(supplied with SC300)
DC and AC Voltage Calibration and Verification, DC Voltage Verification
Digital
Multimeter
HP 3458A
Termination
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Feedthrough
±
1%
6-75
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-41. SC300 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
Frequency
Counter
PM 6680 with option (PM 9621, PM 9624, or
PM 9625) and (PM 9678)
50 kHz to 350 MHz, < 1.6 ppm uncertainty
Adapter Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Adapter
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (Low Frequency) Calibration and Verification
AC Measurement Fluke 5790A
Standard with -03 option
Pomona #3288
Range
Frequency
5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
50 kHz to 10 MHz
BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Spectrum Analyzer
Adapter
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
HP 8590A
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable
Frequency Counter
(supplied with SC300)
Edge Frequency, AC Voltage Frequency Verification
PM 6680 with option (PM
9678)
20 ms to 150 ns, 10 Hz to 10 MHz: < 1.6 ppm uncertainty
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Edge Duty Cycle
Frequency Counter
BNC Cable
PM 6680
(supplied with SC300)
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (High Frequency) Calibration and Verification
Power Meter
Power Sensor
Hewlett-Packard
E4418A
Hewlett-Packard 8481D
Range
Frequency
Power Sensor Hewlett-Packard 8482A Range
Frequency
Range
-42 to +5.6 dBm
Frequency
30 dB
Reference
Attenuator
Hewlett-Packard
11708A
(supplied with HP
8481D)
Adapter Hewlett-Packard BNC(f) to Type N(f)
PN 1250-1474
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
10 - 300 MHz
-20 to +19 dBm
10 - 300 MHz
-42 to -20 dBm
10 - 300 MHz
6-76
SC300 Option
SC300 Calibration Setup
6
Table 6-41. SC300 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency, Time Marker Verification
Frequency
Counter
Adapter
PM 6680 with option
(PM 9621, PM 9624, or
PM 9625) and (PM
9678)
Pomona #3288
2 ns to 5 s, 50 kHz to 500 MHz: < 1.6 ppm uncertainty
BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Wave Generator Verification
AC
Measurement
Fluke 5790A
Standard
Range
Frequency
1.8 mV p-p to 55 V p-p
10 Hz to 100 kHz
Termination
Feedthrough 50
Ω ±
1%.
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
6-100.
SC300 Calibration Setup
The procedures in this manual have been developed to provide users the ability to calibrate the SC300 at their own site if they are required to do so. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification. The unit should be returned with its cable. The Calibrator Mainframe must be fully calibrated prior to performing any of the SC300 calibration procedures.
The hardware adjustments are intended to be one-time adjustments performed in the factory, however, adjustment may be required after repair. Hardware adjustments must be performed prior to calibration. Calibration must be performed after any hardware adjustments. See “Hardware Adjustments” in this chapter.
The AC Square Wave Voltage function is dependent on the DC Voltage function.
Calibration of the AC Voltage function is required after the DC Voltage is calibrated.
The Calibrator Mainframe must complete a warm-up period and the SC300 must be enabled for at least 5 minutes prior to calibration to allow internal components to thermally stabilize. The Calibrator Mainframe warm-up period is at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes. The SC300 is enabled by pressing the front panel a key. The green indicator on the be illuminated when the SC300 is enabled. a key will
Much of the SC300 can be calibrated interactively from the front panel. Enable the
SC300 and wait at least 5 minutes. Enter Scope Cal mode by pressing the front panel
S key, CAL blue softkey, second CAL blue softkey, and SCOPE CAL blue softkey. Entering Scope Cal mode prior to having the SC300 enabled for at least 5 minutes will cause a warning message to be displayed.
All equipment specified for SC300 calibration must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be maintained, and operating within their normal specified operating environment. It is also important to ensure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up prior to its use. Refer to each equipment’s operating manual for details.
Before you begin calibration, you may wish to review all of the procedures in advance to ensure you have the resources to complete them.
6-77
5500A
Service Manual
The Calibrator Mainframe first prompts the user to calibrate the DC Voltage function. If another function is to be calibrated, alternately press the OPTIONS and NEXT
SECTION blue softkeys until the desired function is reached.
6-101.
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
The AC Voltage and Edge functions have square wave voltages that need to be calibrated and verified. The HP3458A digital multimeter can be programmed from either the front panel or over the remote interface to make these measurements.
6-102.
Overview of HP3458A Operation
The Hewlett-Packard 3458A digital multimeter is setup as a digitizer to measure the peak-to-peak value of the signal. It is set to DCV, using various analog-to-digital integration times and triggering commands to measure the topline and baseline of the square wave signal.
6-103.
Setup for Square Wave Measurements
By controlling the HP 3458A’s integration and sample time, it can be used to make accurate, repeatable measurements of both the topline and baseline of the square wave signals up to 10 kHz.
The HP 3458A is triggered by a change in input level. The trigger level is set to 1% of the DCV range, with ac coupling of the trigger signal. The delay after the trigger event is also changed for the of AC Voltage Square Wave and Edge functions. See Table 6-48 and Figure 6-19.
Table 6-48. AC Square Wave Voltage and Edge Settings for the HP3458A
HP 3458A Settings
Voltage
Input Frequency
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
1
.1
NPLC
.01
.002
.001
DELAY (topline)
.02 s
.002 s
.0002 s
.00004 s
.00002 s
DELAY (baseline)
.07 s
.007 s
.0007 s
.00014 s
.00007 s
Note
For this application, if making measurements of a signal > 1 kHz, the HP
3458A has been known to have .05% to .1% peaking in the 100 mV range.
For these signals, lock the HP 3458A to the 1 V range.
6-78
HP 3458A
SC300 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
6
SC300 Cable
5500A-SC300
5500A CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50
Ω
Feedthrough
Termination
NORMAL AUX
V, ,
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
RTD
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX om062f.eps
Figure 6-19. Equipment Setup for SC300 Square Wave Measurements.
For all measurements, the HP 3458A is in DCV, manual ranging, with level triggering enabled. A convenient method to make these measurements from the HP 3458A’s front panel is to program these settings into several of the user defined keys on its front panel.
For example, to make topline measurements at 1 kHz, you would set the DMM to “NPLC
.01; LEVEL 1; DELAY .0002; TRIG LEVEL”. To find the average of multiple readings, you can program one of the keys to “MATH OFF; MATH STAT” and then use the
“RMATH MEAN” function to recall the average or mean value. Refer to Figure 6-19 for the proper connections.
6-104.
DC Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination (as required in the calibration procedure)
•
Shorted Dual Banana Connector
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Note
Full calibration of the Voltage Function requires both dc and ac calibration.
Refer to Figure 6-19 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe in Scope Cal mode, DC Voltage section. Follow these steps to calibrate DC Voltage:
1. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
6-79
5500A
Service Manual
4. Ensure the HP 3458A reading is 0.0 V DC
±
100
µ
V.
5. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
6. Calibration voltages 33 V and greater will automatically put the Calibrator
Mainframe output in standby. When this occurs, press O on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Allow the HP 3458A DC voltage reading to stabilize. Enter the reading via the Calibrator Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, occurs, repair may be necessary.
µ
, n, p). If the warning still
7. Repeat steps 6 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate ac voltage. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
AC voltage must now be calibrated. Continue with the next section.
6-105.
AC Square Wave Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the same equipment and setup as DC Voltage calibration but requires different settings on the HP 3458A. See “Calibration and Verification of Square Wave
Functions” earlier in this section for technical details on the procedure. DC voltages are measured and entered in the Calibrator Mainframe to calibrate the AC Voltage function.
Set up the Calibrator Mainframe to Cal ACV. Press OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “The next steps calibrate -SC300 ACV”. Then follow these steps to calibrate ac voltage:
1. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
3. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
4. For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to retrieve the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave
Measurements” earlier in this chapter for more details.
The “true amplitude” of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance if used.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
6-80
SC300 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
6
5. Repeat step 4 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that WAVEGEN CAL is the next step. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6-106.
Edge Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
Refer to Figure 6-19 for the proper setup connections. Press the OPTIONS and NEXT
SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure fast edge amplitude”. Then follow these steps to calibrate edge amplitude:
1. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana.
2. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step. Note that in the EDGE function, the topline is very near 0V, and the baseline is a negative voltage.
3. For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to enter the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave
Measurements”, earlier in this section, for more details.
The “true amplitude” of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance.
6-107.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug Adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-20 for the proper connections.
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure leveled sine amplitude”. Then follow these steps to calibrate Leveled Sine
Wave amplitude:
1. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
6-81
5500A
Service Manual
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Press O to activate operating mode on the Calibrator Mainframe.
5. Allow the 5790A rms reading to stabilize. Multiply the 5790A reading by (0.5 * (50
+ Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Enter the corrected rms reading via the Calibrator
Mainframe front panel keypad, then press E .
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and calculation and carefully re-enter the corrected rms reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
6. Repeat step 5 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate Leveled Sine flatness. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
10V PEAK
MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
INPUT1 INPUT1 INPUT1
SHUNT
INPUT1
2.2 mV
6
7 mV
0
2.2 mV
22 mV
7
220 mV
8
70 mV
1
700 mV
2
2.2 V
9
3 4
22 V .
220 mV
+/-
5
1kV
ENTER
DELETE
CLEAR
AUTO MAN
VIEW
REF
UTIL
MENUS
SPEC
POWER
I
O
5500A CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
LO
20V PK
MAX
1V PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
STBY
7
4
1
OPR
8
5
2
EARTH SCOPE
9
6
3
µ n m k p
M
BOOST dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
0 • SHIFT ENTER
F
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O om034f.eps
Figure 6-20. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard
6-108.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration
Leveled Sine Wave flatness calibration is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to 10
MHz (low frequency) and > 10 MHz to 300 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Flatness calibration of the low frequency band is made relative to 50 kHz. Flatness calibration of the high frequency band is made relative to 10
MHz.
Leveled Sine Wave flatness is calibrated at multiple amplitudes. Both low and high frequency bands are calibrated at each amplitude. Calibration begins with the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the first amplitude, followed by the
6-82
SC300 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
6
low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the second amplitude, and so on, until the flatness calibration is complete.
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure leveled sine flatness”.
6-109.
Low Frequency Calibration
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the 5790A WIDEBAND input as described under “Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness”.
Follow these steps to calibrate low frequency Leveled Sine Wave flatness for the amplitude being calibrated:
1. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2. Establish the 50 kHz reference:
•
Allow the 5790A rms reading to stabilize.
•
Press the 5790A Set Ref blue softkey. (Clear any previous reference by pressing the 5790A Clear Ref blue softkey prior to setting the new reference if required.)
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Adjust the amplitude using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until the
5790A reference deviation matches the 50 kHz reference within 1000 ppm.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the reference frequency is now 10 MHz. Continue with the high frequency calibration.
6-110.
High Frequency Calibration
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the power meter and power sensor as described in, “Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness” later in this section.
Follow these steps to calibrate high frequency Leveled Sine Wave flatness for the amplitude being calibrated.
1. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2. Establish the 10 MHz reference:
•
Press the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to enter the power sensor’s 10 MHz Cal Factor. Ensure that the factor is correct, then press the power meter ENTER key.
•
Allow the power meter reading to stabilize.
•
Press the Power meter REL key.
3. Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4. Press the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to enter the power sensor’s Cal Factor for the frequency displayed on the Calibrator
Mainframe. Ensure that the factor is correct, then press the power meter ENTER key.
5. Adjust the amplitude using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until the power sensor reading matches the 10 MHz reference within 0.1%.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that either the reference frequency is now 50 kHz or that the next steps calibrate pulse width.
Repeat the low frequency calibration procedure for the next amplitude unless the
Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate pulse width. Press
6-83
5500A
Service Manual
the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6-111.
Verification
All of the Oscilloscope Calibration functions should be verified at least once per year, or each time the SC300 is calibrated. The verification procedures in this section provide traceable results; however the factory uses different procedures and instruments of higher precision than those described here. The procedures in this manual have been developed to provide users the ability to verify the SC300 at their own site if they are required to do so. Fluke strongly recommends that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification.
All equipment specified for SC300 verification must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be maintained, and operating within their normal specified operating environment. It is also important to ensure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up prior to its use. Refer to each equipment’s operating manual for details.
Before you begin verification, you may wish to review all of the procedures in advance to ensure you have the resources to complete them.
6-112.
DC Voltage Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination (as required)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
For DC voltage verification, refer to Figure 6-19 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Then use the next sections to verify the DC Voltage function.
6-113.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
For the 1 M
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 1 M
Ω
(The blue softkey under
Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
2. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-49. Press
Oon the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3. Allow the HP 3458A reading to stabilize, then record the HP 3458A reading for each voltage in Table 6-49.
4. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-114.
Verification at 50
Ω
For the 50
Ω
verification, connect the SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable and the 50
Ω
termination connected to the BNC to Banana Plug adapter.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 50
Ω
(The blue softkey under
Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
6-84
SC300 Option
Verification
6
250.0 mV
-250.0 mV
450.0 mV
-450.0 mV
500.0 mV
-500.0 mV
3.3 V
-3.3 V
4.0 V
-4.0 V
33.0 V
-33.0 V
0.0 mV
5.0 mV
-5.0 mV
22.0 mV
-22.0 mV
25.0 mV
-25.0 mV
45.0 mV
-45.0 mV
50.0 mV
-50.0 mV
220.0 mV
-220.0 mV
1. Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
2. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-50. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3. Allow the HP 3458A reading to stabilize, then record the HP 3458A reading for each voltage in Table 6-50.
Multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance (1-year spec.) column.
Nominal Value (dc)
Table 6-49. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
Measured Value (dc) Deviation (mV)
1.22
1.35
1.35
8.35
8.35
10.10
10.10
82.60
82.60
0.23
0.23
0.65
0.65
0.72
0.72
1.22
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
0.10
0.11
0.11
0.15
0.15
0.16
0.16
0.21
0.21
6-85
5500A
Service Manual
Nominal Value (dc)
Table 6-50. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Measured Value (dc) Deviation (mV)
0.0 mV
5.0 mV
-5.0 mV
10.0 mV
-10.0 mV
22.0 mV
-22.0 mV
25.0 mV
-25.0 mV
55.0 mV
-55.0 mV
100.0 mV
-100.0 mV
220.0 mV
-220.0 mV
250.0 mV
-250.0 mV
550.0 mV
-550.0 mV
700.0 mV
-700.0 mV
2.2 V
-2.2 V
1.47
1.47
1.85
1.85
5.60
5.60
0.24
0.24
0.35
0.35
0.65
0.65
0.72
0.72
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
0.10
0.11
0.11
0.12
0.12
0.15
0.15
0.16
0.16
6-86
SC300 Option
Verification
6
6-115.
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination (as required)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
For ac voltage amplitude verification, refer to Figure 6-19 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Then proceed with the next sections to verify the AC Voltage function.
6-116.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
For the 1 M
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe TRIG OUT connector to the HP 3458A Ext Trig connector located on the rear of that instrument.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 1 M
Ω
. (The blue softkey under
Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
.)
1. When making measurements at 1 kHz, set the HP 3458A to the values shown in
Table 6-48. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
2. Measure the topline first. For each measurement, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A MATH functions to determine the average or mean value. See “Setup Square Wave Measurements” earlier in this section for more details.
3. Measure the baseline of each output after the corresponding topline measurement.
The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Compare the result to the tolerance (1-year spec.) column.
4. When making measurements at the other frequencies, set up the HP 3458A (NPLC and topline and baseline DELAY) per Table 6-48.
6-87
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-51. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
Nominal Value (p-p) Frequency Measured Value (p-p) Deviation (mV) 1-Year Spec. (mV)
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
10 Hz
100 Hz
0.11
0.11
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
10.0 mV
20.0 mV
20.0 mV
20.0 mV
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.12
0.15
0.15
0.15
10.0 V
20.0 V
50.0 V
50.0 V
50.0 V
50.0 V
105.0 V
105.0 V
50.0 mV
89.0 mV
89.0 mV
100.0 mV
200.0 mV
200.0 mV
200.0 mV
500.0 mV
890.0 mV
890.0 mV
1.0 V
1.0 V
1.0 V
2.0 V
5.0 V
5.0 V
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
25.10
50.10
125.10
125.10
125.10
125.10
262.60
262.60
1.35
2.32
2.32
2.60
2.60
2.60
5.10
12.60
12.60
0.23
0.32
0.32
0.35
0.60
0.60
0.60
6-88
SC300 Option
Verification
6
6-117.
Verification at 50
Ω
For the 50
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe, the external 50
Ω
termination, and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. (The 50
Ω
termination is closest to the HP 3458A input.) Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to
50
Ω
. (The blue softkey under Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1
M
Ω
). Proceed with the following steps:
1. Set the HP 3458A to the values shown in Table 6-48. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
2. Measure the topline first, as indicated in Table 6-52. For each measurement, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A MATH functions to determine the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave Measurements” for more details.
3. Measure the baseline of each output after the corresponding topline measurement, as indicated in Table 6-52. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
Nominal Value
(p-p)
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
10.0 mV
10.0 mV
10.0 mV
20.0 mV
44.9 mV
44.9 mV
50.0 mV
100.0 mV
100.0 mV
100.0 mV
200.0 mV
449.0 mV
449.0 mV
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
Table 6-52. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Frequency Measured Value
(p-p)
Deviation
(mV)
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.15
0.21
0.21
0.23
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.60
1.22
1.22
6-89
5500A
Service Manual
Nominal Value
(p-p)
500.0 mV
1.0 V
1.0 V
1.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
Table 6-46. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
(cont.)
Frequency Measured Value
(p-p)
Deviation
(mV)
6-118.
AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Refer to Figure 6-21 for the proper setup connections.
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an TCXO timebase (Option PM 9678 or equivalent)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
1.35
2.60
2.60
2.60
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5500A-SC300
5500A CALIBRATOR
SC300 Cable
PM 6680A
A C
Greater than 50 MHz
NORMAL AUX
V, , A, -SENSE,
AUX V
RTD
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX om063f.eps
Figure 6-21. Frequency Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify ac voltage frequency:
6-90
SC300 Option
Verification
6
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 1M
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.1 V at each frequency listed in Table
6-53.
4. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-53. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 6-53.
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 2.1 V p-p)
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
Table 6-53. AC Voltage Frequency Verification
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency) Tolerance
0.01525 Hz
0.0175 Hz
0.04 Hz
0.265 Hz
6-119.
Edge Amplitude Verification
For the Edge Amplitude verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator
Mainframe, the external 50
Ω
termination, and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
(The 50
Ω
termination is closest to the HP 3458A input.)
1. For measurements of a 1 kHz signal, set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01,
LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). For measurements of a 10 kHz signal, set the HP
3458A to DCV, NPLC = .001, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .00002 for measuring the topline, and the DELAY to .00007 for measuring the baseline.
2. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step. Note that in the EDGE function, the topline is very near 0
V, and the baseline is a negative voltage. See Table 6-54.
3. For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to enter the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave
Measurements” earlier in this section for more details.
4. The peak-to-peak value of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance. Record each reading as indicated in Table 6-54.
6-91
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-54. Edge Amplification Verification
Calibrator
Mainframe Edge
Output
HP 3458A
Range
100 mV, 1 kHz 100 mV dc
1.00V, 1 kHz 1 V dc
5 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
Topline
Reading
10 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
25 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
50 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
100 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
500 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
1.00 V, 10 kHz 1 V dc
Baseline
Reading
Peak-to-
Peak
Peak-to-
Peak x
Correction
Tolerance
(
±
V)
0.0022
0.0202
0.0003
0.0004
0.0007
0.0012
0.0022
0.0102
0.0202
2.5 V, 10 kHz 10 V dc 0.0502
6-120.
Edge Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM
9691)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-21 for proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press O on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify Edge frequency:
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.5 V at each frequency listed in Table
6-55.
4. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-55. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 6-55.
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 2.5 V p-p)
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz
1 MHz
Table 6-55. Edge Frequency Verification
PM 6680 Reading (Frequency)
0.025 Hz
0.25 Hz
2.50 Hz
25.0 Hz
Tolerance
6-92
SC300 Option
Verification
6
6-121.
Edge Duty Cycle Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-21 for proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press O on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify Edge duty cycle.
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure duty cycle on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.5 V at 1 MHz.
4. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize. Compare the duty cycle reading to 50%
±
5%.
6-122.
Edge Rise Time Verification
This procedure tests the edge function’s rise time. Aberrations are also checked with the
Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope and SD-22/26 sampling head.
The following equipment is used to verify the edge rise time.
•
High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix SD-
22/26 sampling head
•
3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
•
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
•
second BNC cable
Connect the BNC cable supplied with the SC300 to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to one BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter then to the DSO’s sampling head through the 3 dB attenuator.
Using the second BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter and BNC cable, connect the Calibrator
Mainframe’s TRIG OUT connector to the 11801’s Trigger Input. Refer to Figure 6-22.
Set the scope trigger amplitude to “divide by 10”.
6-93
5500A
Service Manual
Tek 11801
With 5D26 Sampling Head
5500A-SC300
5500A CALIBRATOR
3 dB Attenaator
3.5 mm (m/f)
SC300
Cable
NORMAL AUX
V, , A, -SENSE,
RTD AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
BNC(F) to
3.5 mm (m)
Adapter om064f.eps
Figure 6-22. Edge Rise Time Verification Setup
The Calibrator Mainframe should be in SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Press the softkey under TRIG to select the TRIG/1 External Trigger output. Program the Calibrator
Mainframe to output 250 mV @ 1 kHz. Set the DSO to these parameters:
Digital Storage Oscilloscope Setup
Main Time Base position (initial)
Horizontal scale
Measurement Function
40 ns
500 ps/div
Rise Time
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage and frequency listed in Table
6-56. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2. Change the vertical scale of the DSO to the value listed in the table. Adjust the main time base position and vertical offset until the edge signal is centered on the display.
Record the rise time measurement in column A of Table 6-56. Refer to Figure 6-23.
3. Correct the rise time measurement by accounting for the SD-22/26 sampling head’s rise time. The SD-22/26 rise time is specified as < 28 ps. Column B = sqrt((Column
A)
2
- (SD-22/26 rise time)
2
).
4. The edge rise time measured should be less than the time indicated in Table 6-56.
6-94
SC300 Option
Verification
6
90%
Rise time measures between these two points
10% om033i.eps
Figure 6-23. Edge Rise Time
Table 6-56. Edge Rise Time Verification
Calibrator Mainframe Output
Voltage
250 mV
500 mV
1 V
2.5 V
Frequency
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
DSO
Vertical
Axis
(mV/div)
20.0
50.0
100.0
200.0
A
11801
Reading
B
Corrected
Reading Tolerance
< 400 ps
< 400 ps
< 400 ps
< 400 ps
6-123.
Edge Abberation Verification
The following equipment is needed for this procedure:
•
Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope with SD22/26 sampling head
•
Output cable provided with the SC300
•
Use the same trigger setup found in the“Edge Rise Time Verification” section.
Before you begin this procedure, verify that the 5520A-SC300 is in the edge mode (the
Edge menu is displayed), and program it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz. Press O to activate the output.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the oscilloscope as in Figure 6-22. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 10 mV/div and horizontal to 1 ns/div. Set the oscilloscope to look at the 90% point of the edge signal; use this point as the reference level. Set the oscilloscope to look at the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
With these settings, each vertical line on the oscilloscope represents a 1% aberration.
Determine that the SC300 falls within the typical specifications shown in Table 6-57.
6-95
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-57. Edge Aberrations
Time from 50% of Rising Edge
0 - 10 ns
10 - 30 ns
> 30 ns
Typical Edge Aberrations
< 22 mV (2.2%)
< 12 mV (1.2%)
< 7 mV (0.7%)
6-124.
Leveled Sine Wave Reference Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-20 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display.
Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave amplitude.
1. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-58.
4. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A’s rms reading for each voltage listed in Table 6-58.
5. Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor of 2.8284 to convert it to the peakto-peak value.
6. Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-96
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 50 kHz)
5.0 mV
10.0 mV
20.0 mV
40.0 mV
50.0 mV
100.0 mV
200.0 mV
400.0 mV
500.0 mV
1.3 V
2.0 V
5.5 V
Table 6-58. Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification
5790A Reading
(V rms)
5790A Reading x 2.8284
(V p-p)
Tolerance
(V p-p)
0.4 mV
0.5 mV
0.7 mV
1.1 mV
1.3 mV
2.3 mV
4.3 mV
8.3 mV
10.3 mV
0.0263 V
0.0403 V
0.1103 V
6-125.
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input
(Option PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM 9691)
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-21 for the proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave amplitude.
1. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and 50
Ω
impedance.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the PM 6680 at the channel indicated in Table 6-59. You will need the BNC-N adapter for the connection to Channel C.
3. Set the filter on the PM 6680 as indicated in the table.
4. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output as listed in Table 6-59. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
5. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-59.
6-97
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-59. Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
PM 6680 Settings PM 6680 Reading Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 5.5 V p-p)
50 kHz
500 kHz
5 MHz
50 MHz
300 MHz
A
A
A
A
Channel
C
Filter
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
(Frequency)
Tolerance
1.25 Hz
12.5 Hz
125.0 Hz
1250 Hz
12500 Hz
6-126.
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 8590A Spectrum Analyzer
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-24 for proper setup connections.
HP 8590 5500A-SC300
5500A CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to Type N (M)
Adapter
SC300
Cable
NORMAL AUX
V, , A, -SENSE,
RTD AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX om066f.eps
Figure 6-24. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display.
Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave harmonics.
1. Using the BNC cable and BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP 8590A.
2. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to 5.5 V p-p at each frequency listed in Table 6-
60. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
6-98
SC300 Option
Verification
6
3. Set HP 8590A start frequency to the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency. Set HP
8590A stop frequency to 10 times the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency. Set the HP 8590A reference level at +19 dBm.
4. Record the harmonic level reading for each frequency and harmonic listed in Table 6-
60. For harmonics 3, 4, and 5, record the highest harmonic level of the three measured. Harmonics should be below the levels listed in the tolerance column of
Table 6-60.
Table 6-60. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Output Frequency
(@ 5.5 V p-p)
1 MHz
2 MHz
2 MHz
4 MHz
4 MHz
8 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
20 MHz
40 MHz
40 MHz
50 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
200 kHz
200 kHz
400 kHz
400 kHz
800 kHz
800 kHz
1 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
200 MHz
250 MHz
250 MHz
Harmonic
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
HP 8590A Reading (dB) Tolerance
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
6-99
5500A
Service Manual
6-127.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification
Leveled Sine Wave flatness verification is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to
10 MHz (low frequency) and > 10 MHz to 300 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Leveled Sine Wave flatness is measured relative to 50 kHz. This is determined directly in the low frequency band. The high frequency band requires a “transfer” measurement be made at 10 MHz to calculate a flatness relative to
50 kHz.
6-128.
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness
All low frequency flatness procedures use the following equipment:
•
5790A/03 AC Measurement Standard with Wideband option
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the 5790A WIDEBAND input with the BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter as shown in Figure 6-25. Set the 5790A to
AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi Res on.
6-100
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
10V PEAK
MAX
INPUT1 INPUT1 INPUT1 SHUNT INPUT1
2.2 mV
6
7 mV
0
2.2 mV
22 mV
7
220 mV
8
70 mV
1
700 mV
2
2.2 V
9
3 4
22 V .
220 mV
+/-
5
1kV
ENTER
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
DELETE
CLEAR
AUTO MAN
VIEW
REF
UTIL
MENUS
SPEC
POWER
I
O
5500A CALIBRATOR
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
LO
1V PK
MAX
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
TC
STBY
7
4
1
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
8
5
2
9
6
3
µ m n k p
M dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU
F sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
0 •
SHIFT
ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O om034f.eps
Figure 6-25. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard
6-129.
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness
All high frequency flatness procedures use the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard E4418A Power Meter
•
Hewlett-Packard 8482A and 8481D Power Sensors
•
BNC(f) to Type N(f) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
Note
When high frequencies at voltages below 63 mV p-p are verified, use the
8481D Power Sensor. Otherwise, use the 8482A Power Sensor.
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Connect the HP E4418A Power Meter to either the 8482A or the 8481D Power Sensor as shown in Figure 6-26. For more information on connecting the two instruments, see the power meter and power sensor operators manuals.
Connect the power meter/power sensor combination to the SCOPE connector on the
Calibrator Mainframe, as shown in Figure 6-27.
The Hewlett-Packard E4418A Power Meter must be configured by setting the parameters listed below. Zero and self-calibrate the power meter with the power sensor being used.
Refer to the Hewlett-Packard E4418A operators manual for details.
•
PRESET
•
RESOLN 3
•
AUTO FILTER
•
WATTS
•
SENSOR TABLE 0 (default)
OM035f.eps
Figure 6-26. Connecting the HP E4418A Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D Power Sensor
5500A CALIBRATOR
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, ,
RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE,
AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
LO
1V PK
MAX
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
TC
STBY
7
4
1
OPR
8
5
EARTH SCOPE
9
6 n m k p
M
BOOST dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
2
0
3
•
SHIFT
ENTER
F
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O om036f.eps
Figure 6-27. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor
6-101
5500A
Service Manual
6-130.
Low Frequency Verification
This procedure provides an example of testing low frequency flatness using a 5.5 V output. Follow the same procedure for testing other amplitudes, only compare results against the flatness specification listed in Table 6-61.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 500 kHz. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize. The 5790A should display approximately 1.94
V rms. Enter the 5790A reading in Column A of Table 6-61.
3. Enter 50 kHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the 5790A reading in Column B of Table 6-61.
4. Enter the next frequency listed in Table 6-61. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the reading into Column A of the table.
5. Enter 50 kHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the 5790A reading in Column B of Table 6-61.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of frequencies listed in Table 6-61. Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7. When you have completed Columns A and B, press Y to remove the Calibrator
Mainframe’s output. Complete Table 6-61 by performing the calculations for column
C. Compare Column C to the specifications listed in the final column.
Calibrator
Mainframe
Frequency
500 kHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
5 MHz
10 MHz
Table 6-61. Low Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
A B C
50 kHz
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Specification (%)
±
1.50 + 100
µ
V
±
1.50 + 100
µ
V
±
1.50 + 100
µ
V
±
1.50 + 100
µ
V
±
1.50 + 100
µ
V
Complete Columns A-C as follows:
A Enter 5790A Reading (mV) for the present frequency.
B Enter 5790A Reading (mV) for 50 kHz.
C Compute and enter the Calibrator Mainframe Flatness Deviation (%): 100 * ((Column A entry)-
(Column B entry))/ (Column B entry)
6-131.
High Frequency Verification
This procedure provides an example of testing high frequency flatness using a 5.5 V output. Follow the same procedure for testing other amplitudes, only compare results against the flatness specification listed in Table 6-62. For this voltage range, you will use the model HP 8482A power sensor.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 30 MHz. Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize. The power meter should display approximately 75 mW. Enter the power meter’s reading in Column A of Table 6-62.
6-102
SC300 Option
Verification
6
3. Enter 10 MHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize, then enter the power meter’s reading in Column B of Table 6-62.
4. Enter the next frequency listed in Table 6-62. Allow the power meter’s reading to stabilize, then enter the reading into Column A of the table.
5. Enter 10 MHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize, then enter the power meter’s reading in Column B of Table 6-62.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of frequencies listed in Table 6-62. Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7. When you have completed Columns A and B, press Y to remove the Calibrator
Mainframe’s output. Complete Table 6-62 by performing the calculations for each column. Compare Column E to the specifications listed in the final column.
Table 6-62. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
50
±
1.50 +100 uV
±
1.50 +100 uV
100
±
1.50 +100 uV
125
±
2.00 + 100 uV
160
±
2.00 + 100 uV
200
±
2.00 + 100 uV
220
±
2.00 + 100 uV
235
±
2.00 + 100 uV
250
±
2.00 + 100 uV
300
±
2.00 + 100 uV
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A
B
Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C
D
E
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6-103
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-63. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 7.5 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
50
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
100
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
125
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
160
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
200
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
220
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
235
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
250
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
300
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A
B
Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C
D
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
E Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
Table 6-64. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 25 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
50
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
100
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
125
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
160
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
200
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
220
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
235
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
250
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
300
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A
B
Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C
D
E
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column
D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6-104
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Table 6-65. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 70 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
50
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
100
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
125
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
160
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
200
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
220
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
235
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
250
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
300
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
B Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
E Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
Table 6-66. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 250 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
50
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
100
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
125
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
160
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
200
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
220
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
235
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
250
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
300
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
B Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
E Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6-105
5500A
Service Manual
Table 6-67. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 800 mV
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
20
50
100
125
160
200
220
235
250
300
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
B Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W).
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
E Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
Table 6-68. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 3.4 V
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
A
B
10 MHz
C D E
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
20
50
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
100
±
1.50 +100
µ
V
125
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
160
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
200
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
220
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
235
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
250
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
300
±
2.00 + 100
µ
V
Complete Columns A-E as follows:
A Enter the E4418A present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the E4418A 10 MHz Reading (W). B
C Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry).
D
E
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry).
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column C entry) - sqrt(Column D entry)) / sqrt(Column D entry).
6-106
SC300 Option
Verification
6
6-132.
Time Marker Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input
(Option PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM 9691)
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-21 for the proper setup connections. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and
50
Ω
impedance.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Marker menu on the display.
Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to for each period listed in Table 6-69.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to the output as listed in Table 6-69.
2. Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the PM 6680 at the channel indicated in Table 6-69. You will need the BNC-N adapter for the connection to Channel C.
3. Set the filter on the PM 6680 as indicated in the table. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed for the
Calibrator Mainframe.
4. Invert the PM 6680’s frequency reading to derive the period. For example, a reading of 1.000006345 kHz has a period of:
1/1.000006345 kHz = 0.999993655 ms.
Record the period in the table and compare to the tolerance column.
6-107
5500A
Service Manual
Calibrator
Mainframe
Period
Table 6-69. Time Marker Verification
PM 6680Settings
Channel Filter
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency)
s On s On
1
PM 6680 Reading
(Period)
Tolerance
50.0
µ s
20.0
µ s
10.0
µ s
1.0
µ s ns Off ns Off ns Off ns Off ns 50E-15
6-133.
Wave Generator Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
For wave generation verification procedures, refer to Figure 6-28 for the proper setup connections.
6-108
SC300 Option
Verification
6
5500A-SC300
5500A CALIBRATOR
SC300
Cable
NORMAL AUX
V, , A, -SENSE,
RTD AUX V
SCOPE
200V PK
MAX
HI
1000V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
OUT
20V PK
MAX
LO
1V PK
MAX
TC
20V PK
MAX
BNC (F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50
Ω
Feed Through
Termination om065f.eps
Figure 6-28. Wave Generator Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Wavegen menu on the display.
Press O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Set the offset to 0 mV, and the frequency to 1 kHz. Then follow these steps to verify the wave generator function.
6-134.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
1. Set the Calibrator Mainframe impedance to 1 M
Ω
(The blue softkey under SCOPE Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
2. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double
Banana adapter.
3. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
4. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the wave type and voltage listed in
Table 6-70.
5. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A rms reading for each wave type and voltage in Table 6-70.
6. Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor listed to convert it to the peak-topeak value. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-135.
Verification at 50
Ω
1. Set the Calibrator Mainframe impedance to 50
Ω
(The blue softkey under SCOPE Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
2. Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
3. Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
6-109
5500A
Service Manual
sine sine sine sine sine square square square square square triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle
4. Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the wave type and voltage listed in
Table 6-71.
5. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A rms reading for each wave type and voltage in Table 6-71.
6. Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor listed to convert it to the peak-topeak value.
7. Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance column.
Calibrator
Mainframe
Wave Type
square
Table 6-70. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 10 kHz)
5790A
Reading
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A Reading x
Conversion Factor
(V p-p)
5.0 mV
89 mV
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
219 mV
890 mV
6.5 V
55 V
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000 mV 2.8284 mV 2.8284
89 mV 2.8284
219 mV
890 mV
6.5 V
55 V
89 mV
219 mV
890 mV
6.5 V
55 V
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
Tolerance
(V p-p)
250.00
2.770 mV
6.670 mV
26.8 mV
195.1 mV
1.65 V
µ
V
2.770 mV
6.670 mV
26.8 mV
195.1 mV
1.65 V
2.770 mV
6.670 mV
26.8 mV
195.1 mV
1.65 V
6-110
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments
6 sine sine sine sine sine
Calibrator
Mainframe
Wave Type
square square square
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 10 kHz)
Table 6-71. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω
5790A
Reading
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A Reading x
Conversion Factor
(V p-p)
5.0 mV 2.0000
45 mV
109 mV square 0.45V square 1.09V square 2.20V
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.8284
2.8284 triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle
45 mV
109 mV
0.45 V
1.09 V
2.20 V
45 mV
109 mV
0.45 V
1.09 V
2.20 V
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
2.8284
3.4641
3.4641
Tolerance
(V p-p)
250.00
µ
V
1.450 mV
3.370 mV
1.450 mV
3.370 mV
13.570 mV
32.500 mV
66.100 mV
1.450 mV
3.370 mV
13.570 mV
32.500 mV
66.100 mV
6-136.
SC300 Hardware Adjustments
Note
Before beginning SC300 hardware adjustments, it must determined which revision of the option is installed in the instrument. To do this, remove the top cover of the calibrator and look at the circuit board tab protruding through the guard cover that is closest to the right front corner of the calibrator. If this tab is marked A4, proceed to the“SC300 Hardware
Adjustments for the A4 Board” section of this manual.
Hardware adjustments must be made to the leveled sine and edge functions each time the
SC300 is repaired. In addition to the adjustment procedures, this section provides lists of the required equipment and some recommendations on models that have the capabilities required by these procedures. Equivalent models can be substituted if necessary.
6-111
5500A
Service Manual
6-137.
Equipment Required
The following equipment is necessary for performing the hardware adjustments described in this section. The models listed are recommended for providing accurate results.
•
Standard adjustment tool for adjusting the pots and trimmer caps
•
Extender Card (pn 661865, 5800A-7006K, Extender Kit )
•
Oscilloscope Mainframe and Sampling Head (Tektronix 11801 with SD-22/26 or
Tektronix TDS 820 with 8 GHz bandwidth)
•
10 dB Attenuator (Weinschel 9-10 (SMA), or Weinschel 18W-10, or equivalent)
•
Cable provided with SC300
•
Spectrum Analyzer (Hewlett-Packard 8590A)
6-138.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function
There is one adjustment procedure that needs to be made for the leveled sine wave function. The procedure adjusts the harmonics.
6-139.
Equipment Setup
This procedure uses the spectrum analyzer. Before you begin this procedure, verify that the Calibrator Mainframe is in leveled sine wave mode (the Levsine menu is displayed), and program it to output 5.5 V p-p @ 50 MHz. Press O to activate the output.
Refer to Figure 6-24 for setup connections and connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the
Spectrum Analyzer. Adjust the Spectrum Analyzer so that it displays one peak across its horizontal centerline. The far right of the peak is fixed at the far right of the centerline, as shown below.
6-140.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
Note
This procedure should only be used for adjusting the leveled sine wave harmonics. Do not use this procedure as a verification test. The specifications in this procedure are not valid for verification.
Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency 50 MHz
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
500 MHz
3 MHz
3 kHz
Reference Level 20 dBm
Use your Spectrum Analyzer’s Peak Search function to find the desired reference signal.
The Analyzer should show the fundamental, and second and third harmonics. The harmonics need to be adjusted so that the second harmonic is at -34 dBc and third harmonic should typically be greater than or equal to -39 dBc as shown in Figure 6-29.
To adjust the harmonics, adjust R8, as shown in Figure 6-29 until the peaks of the second and third harmonic are at the correct dB level. You may find that you can place the second harmonic at -34 dBc but the third harmonic is less than -39 dBc. If this is the case, continue adjusting R8 until the third harmonic is at –39dBc and the second harmonic is
6-112
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments
6 greater than or equal to –34dBc The second harmonic will fluctuate, but there is a point at which both harmonics will be at the correct decibel level.
-34 dBc
-39 dBc
R8
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic yg127f.eps
Figure 6-29. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
6-141.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function
Adjustments need to be made after repair to the edge function to adjust the edge aberrations.
6-142.
Equipment Setup
The following equipment is needed for this procedure:
•
Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with SD22/26 input module or Tektronix TDS 820 with 8 GHz bandwidth.
•
20 dB Attenuator: Weinschel 9-20 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-20 or equivalent
•
Output cable provided with the SC300
Before you begin this procedure, verify that the SC300 is in the edge mode (the Edge menu is displayed), and program it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz. Press O to activate the output.
Refer to Figure 6-22 for the proper setup connections and connect the Calibrator
Mainframe to the oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 1 mV/div and horizontal to
1 ns/div. Set the oscilloscope to look at the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
6-143.
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations
Refer to Figure 6-30 while making the following adjustments:
1. Set the oscilloscope to display the 90% point of the edge signal. Note this voltage (or set to center of the display) as it will be used as the reference for the following adjustments.
2. Set the oscilloscope to display the leading edge and the first 10 ns of the edge signal.
Adjust A90R13 to set the edge signal at the 10 ns point to the reference level.
3. Adjust A90R12 to flatten out the edge signal. Readjust A90R13 if necessary to keep the edge signal at the reference level.
4. Adjust A90R35 so the first overshoot is the same amplitude as the second aberration.
6-113
5500A
Service Manual
5. Readjust A90R36 to center the first two aberrations about reference level.
6. Readjust A90R13 if necessary to keep the edge signal at 10 ns to be at the reference level.
7. Readjust A90R36 ,A90R35 or A90R12 to obtain equal amplitudes of the aberrations displayed during the first 10 ns to be equally above and below the reference level. Check the aberrations , compare with specifications. It may be necessary to slow the rise time(A90R35) to reduce the amplitude of the aberrations.
8. Set the UUT output to 2.5 V and the oscilloscope vertical to 2 mV/div. Check the aberrations.
9. Remove the 20 dB attenuator from the oscilloscope input. Connect the UUT to the scope input and program the UUT output to 250 mV.
10. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 5 mV/div. Check the aberrations.
11. Check for rise time < 950 ps
±
25 ps at 250 mV, 1 V, and 2.5 V outputs.
1st Aberration
2nd Aberration
3rd Aberration
T
R36
R12
R13
R35
Figure 6-30. Adjusting Edge Aberrations
om050f.eps
6-114
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board
6
6-144.
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board
Hardware adjustments must be made to the leveled sine and edge functions each time the
SC300 is repaired. In addition to the adjustment procedures, this section provides lists of the required equipment and some recommendations on models that have the capabilities required by these procedures. Equivalent models can be substituted if necessary.
6-145.
Equipment Required
The following equipment is necessary for performing the hardware adjustments described in this section. The models listed are recommended for providing accurate results.
•
Standard adjustment tool for adjusting the pots and trimmer caps
•
Extender Card
•
Oscilloscope Mainframe and Sampling Head (Tektronix 11801B with SD-22)
•
Delay Cable, 60 ns
•
Spectrum Analyzer (Hewlett Packard 8590A)
6-146.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function
There are two adjustment procedures that need to be made for the leveled sine wave function. The first procedure adjusts the balance out of the LO VCO so that the signal is balanced between the two VCOs. The second procedure adjusts the harmonics.
6-147.
Equipment Setup
This procedure uses the spectrum analyzer. Before you begin this procedure, verify that the Calibrator Mainframe is in leveled sine wave mode (the Levsine menu is displayed), and program it to output 5.5V p-p @ 110 MHz. Press O to activate the output.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the Spectrum Analyzer. Adjust the Spectrum
Analyzer so that it displays one peak across its horizontal center line. The far right of the peak is fixed at the far right of the center line, as shown below.
6-148.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance
Once you have completed the setup described above, perform the following procedure to adjust the VCO balance for the leveled sine wave function.
1. Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5V @ 110 MHz.
2. Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
110 MHz
113 MHz
30 kHz
3 kHz
Reference Level 20 dBm
The Spectrum Analyzer will display a spur in the waveform approximately 1 MHz away from the carrier frequency. Refer to Figure 6-31 to identify the spur.
3. You need to adjust the wave until the spur disappears. To do this, slowly rotate R44
(shown in the diagram) counterclockwise until the spur just disappears. As you adjust
6-115
5500A
Service Manual
it, the spur will move down the waveform, towards the right. As soon as the spur is gone, stop rotating R44. If you rotate it too far, the spur will reappear.
Once you have turned R44 to the point at which the spur just disappears, the signal is balanced between the VCOs and you have completed the adjustment.
R44
6-116 om037f.eps
Figure 6-31. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Balance
6-149.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
The following procedure adjusts the harmonics for the leveled sine wave function.
Note
This procedure should only be used for adjusting the leveled sine wave harmonics. Do not use this procedure as a verification test. The specifications in this procedure are not valid for verification.
1. Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
Reference Level
50 MHz
500 MHz
3 MHz
3 kHz
20 dBm
2. Use your Spectrum Analyzer’s Peak Search function to find the desired reference signal. The Analyzer should show the fundamental, and second and third harmonics.
The harmonics need to be adjusted so that the second harmonic is at 40 dBc and third harmonic should typically be at 50 dBc as shown in Figure 6-32.
3. To adjust the harmonics, adjust R8, as shown in Figure 6-32 until the peaks of the second and third harmonic are at the correct dB level. You may find that you can place the second harmonic at 40 dBc but the third harmonic is not at 50 dBc. If this is the case, continue adjusting R8. The second harmonic will fluctuate, but there is a point at which both harmonics will be at the correct decibel level.
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board
6
40 dBc
50 dBc
R57
R168
R16
R1
R8
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic om038f.eps
Figure 6-32. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
6-150.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function
Adjustments need to be made after repair to the edge function to adjust the edge aberrations. There are two SC300 boards currently available, and each requires separate aberration adjustment procedures; thus certain procedure headings include specific part numbers. The two boards are listed below. Check the part number of your board before you begin aberration adjustments. If you are not certain which board you have, contact your Fluke Service Center.
•
SC300 Board 5500A-4004-1 (Fluke PN 600749)
•
SC300 Board 5500A-4004 (Fluke PN 937383)
Note
To verify the edge aberrations back to national standards, you should send your Calibrator Mainframe to Fluke, or other facility that has established traceability for aberrations. Fluke, for example, has a reference pulse that is sent to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) for characterization. This information is then transferred to high speed sampling heads, which are used to adjust and verify the SC300.
6-151.
Equipment Setup
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 1V p-p @ 100 kHz. Set the Trigger to /1.
Using the 60 ns Delay Cable, connect the SCOPE output of the Calibrator Mainframe to the SD-22 sampling head on the oscilloscope. Connect the trigger output to the 11801B’s trigger input. Then set the sampling heads to the settings listed below, to establish a reference signal.
In addition to the settings shown below, adjust the scan control for a well-triggered display. (You may need to adjust the signal averaging on the 11801B.)
6-117
5500A
Service Manual
11801B Setup
dc offset
Dot Response
Centered
Centered
Smooth On
Time Base Position 5
µ s
Trigger Level Center, negative slope
Trigger Input
External Trigger x10
1 M
Ω
Sequential On
Scan Repetitive On
6-152.
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations for Board 5500A-4004-1
Follow this procedure only if you have Board 5500A-4004-1 (Fluke PN 600749).
1. Adjust the dc offset on the 11801B so the last 500 ns of the peak of the square wave is on the center line.
2. Change the time/div on the 11801B to 20 ns/div.
3. Slowly adjust pot R168 and observe its effect on the waveform. the left half of the wave peak will move up and down as you turn R168. Adjust R168 until the center of the wave peak is half of a division above the center line, as shown in Figure 6-33.
4. Change the time/div on the 11801B to 5 ns/div.
5. Slowly adjust R57. It will affect the first 50 ns of the wave form. Adjust R57 so the rising edge falls back and crosses the horizontal center line one division before the vertical center. Refer to Figure 6-34. The base of the aberration should be 10 ns apart.
6. Change the time/div on the 11801B to 2 ns/div.
7. Adjust R16 until the rising edge ledge reaches the center line. Refer to Figure 6-35.
8. Return to 5 ns/div and verify that the pattern shown in Figure 6-34 still exists. Repeat the adjustment in step 5 if necessary.
9. At this point in the adjustment, each graticule line on the oscilloscope represents a
1% aberration. Typically this board shows aberrations of 0.5% within the first 10 ns, and aberrations of 0.25% during the following 10-30 ns.
6-118
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board
6
Waveform moves as R168 is adjusted
R57
R168
R16
R1
10 ns
Adjusted waveform
Figure 6-33. Adjusting the Wave Peak Center with R168
om039f.eps
R57
R168
R16
R1 om040f.eps
Figure 6-34. Adjusting Base of Peak with R57
6-119
5500A
Service Manual
Ledge on center line
R57
R168
R16
R1
6-120 om041f.eps
Figure 6-35. Adjusting the Ledge with R16
Note
Aberration adjustments are interactive with rise time adjustments. When you have completed this aberration adjustment, verify the edge rise time to ensure that it remains within tolerance. If it does not, repeat the aberration and rise time adjustments until you achieve the best compromise, within the listed tolerance levels.
6-153.
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations for Board 5500A-4004
Follow this procedure only if you have Board 5500A-4004 (Fluke PN 937383).
1. Adjust the dc offset on the 11801B so the peak of the square wave is on the center line.
2. Change the time/div on the 11801B to 5 ns/div.
3. Adjust R16 so that the wave crosses the horizontal center line one division before the vertical center.
4. Slowly adjust pot R57 and observe its effect on the first 15 ns of the waveform.
5. Adjust R57 so the rising edge falls back and crosses the horizontal center line one division before the vertical center. The edge should cross the center line at two points, where it rises and falls, and these points should be 20 ns apart. Refer to
Figure 6-36.
6. Change the time/div on the 11801B to 2 ns/div.
7. Now adjust pot R1, and observe the ledge that occurs within the first 2 ns of the rising edge. Adjust R1 so this ledge is as flat as possible. Refer to Figure 6-37.
8. Now adjust R57 until this first ledge is on the horizontal center line. When you make this adjustment, the ledge will lose some of its flatness.
9. Return to R1 and flatten the ledge as much as possible. Then return to R57 and try to position the ledge on the center line while keeping it as flat as possible. You want to achieve the best combination of flatness and position.
As you make these adjustments, make sure the peak remains between 4 ns and 6 ns. It is possible to achieve a very flat ledge close to the horizontal center, but if the peak is too high or too low, then the aberrations will not be properly adjusted.
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments for the A4 Board
6
Typically this board shows aberrations of 1%.
Note
Aberration adjustments are interactive with rise time adjustments. When you have completed this aberration adjustment, verify the edge rise time to ensure that it remains within tolerance. If it does not, repeat the aberration and rise time adjustments until you achieve the best compromise, within the listed tolerance levels.
R57
R168
R16
R1
20 ns
Figure 6-36. Adjusting the Peak Base with R57
Adjust R1 so the first 2ns are as flat as possible.
R57
R168
R16
R1 om042f.eps om043f.eps
Figure 6-37. Adjust the Ledge Flatness with R1
6-121
5500A
Service Manual
6-154.
Adjusting the Rise Time for the Edge Function
This procedure adjusts the edge rise time, and must be performed after repair. Both boards use the same procedure to adjust the rise time.
6-155.
Equipment Setup
Before you start this procedure, program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 250 mV pp @ 100 kHz. Program the digital storage oscilloscope to the parameters listed below.
Digital Storage Oscilloscope Setup
Vertical Axis: 50 mV/div
Horizontal Axis: 1 ns/div
6-156.
Adjusting the Edge Rise Time
Only one adjustment needs to be made to the edge rise time. You want a rise time of
950 ps ± 25 ps. To achieve this rise time, adjust C1 until this rise time on the oscilloscope is within this range as shown in Figure 6-38.
Rise time measures between these two points
10%
90%
C1 om044f.eps
Figure 6-38. Adjusting the Edge Rise Time with C1
6-122
Index
—5—
5500A phase specifications, 1-21
—A—
AC current (non-sinewave) specifications, 1-30
AC current (sinewaves) extended bandwidth specifications, 1-29
AC current (sinewaves) specifications, 1-13
AC current, squarewave characteristics (typical),
1-31
AC current, trianglewave characteristics (typical),
1-31
AC power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) specification summary,
AC voltage (non-sinewave) specifications, 1-27
AC Voltage (sinewave) extended bandwidth
AC voltage (sinewave) specifications, 1-10
AC Voltage frequency function
AC voltage, dc offset specifications, 1-28
AC voltage, squarewave characteristics, 1-29
AC voltage, trianglewave characteristics (typical),
1-29
Additional specifications, 1-24
—C—
Calculating power uncertainty, 1-23
Calibration
Capacitance, four-wire comp, 3-14
NORM volts and AUX current phase, 3-15
NORM volts and AUX volts phase, 3-15
Capacitance specifications, 1-15
Current assembly (A7)
—D—
DC current specifications, 1-8
DC power specification summary, 1-19
DC Voltage function
Verification, 6-21, 6-29, 6-79, 6-84
DC voltage specifications, 1-7
DDS assembly (A6)
Diagnostic testing
Sequence of diagnostics tests, 4-7
—E—
Edge Duty Cycle function
1
5500A
Service Manual
Edge Frequency function
Edge function
adjusting the rise time, 6-122
Rise time verification, 6-36, 6-93
Theory of Operation, 6-12, 6-72
Edge Function
Encoder assembly (A2)
Equipment required for calibration and verification,
Error messages
SC Option not installed, 6-5, 6-67
—M—
Main CPU assembly (A9)
MeasZ Capacitance
MeasZ function
MeasZ Function
Capacitance Specifications, 6-11
Resistance Specifications, 6-11
MeasZ Resistance
—O—
Overload function
Overload Function
—F—
Frequency specifications, 1-24
—G—
—H—
Hardware adjustments for SC300, 6-111
Hardware adjustments for SC300 Option, 6-115
Hardware adjustments for SC600, 6-60
Harmonics (2nd - 50th) specifications, 1-25
—P—
Performance verification. See Verification
Phase specifications, 5500A, 1-21
Power and dual output limit specifications, 1-21
Pulse Function
Pulse Generator Function
Pulse period verification, 6-57
Pulse Width function
Calibration, 6-25 equipment setup, 6-25
Verification
Pulse width verification, 6-56
—L—
Leveled Sine Wave function
adjusting the harmonics, 6-62, 6-116
adjusting VCO balance, 6-61, 6-115
Amplitude Verification, 6-40, 6-96
Flatness Verification
High frequency at 5.5 V, 6-102
Low frequency equipment setup, 6-40, 6-44,
Frequency Verification, 6-41, 6-97
Harmonics Verification, 6-42, 6-98
Theory of Operation, 6-12, 6-72
Leveled Sine Wave Function
—R—
Remote commands for calibration, 3-16
Removing
The Encoder (A2) and Display PCAs, 4-4
The Keyboard and Accessing the Output Block,
Required equipment for calibration and verification,
Resistance specifications, 1-9
2
Index
(continued)
—S—
SC300. Seealso
Error Message indicating not installed, 6-67
Hardware adjustments, 6-111, 6-115
User's servicing abilities, 6-67
SC600. See
Error Message indicating not installed, 6-5
User's servicing abilities, 6-5
Scope Calibration. See SC300. See SC600
AC current (non-sinewave), 1-30
AC current (sinewaves) extended bandwidth,
1-29
AC current, squarewave characteristics (typical),
1-31
AC current, trianglewave characteristics
(typical), 1-31
AC power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) summary, 1-20
AC voltage (non-sinewave), 1-27
AC voltage (sinewave) extended bandwidth,
AC voltage, dc offset, 1-28
AC voltage, squarewave characteristics, 1-29
AC voltage, trianglewave characteristics
(typical), 1-29
Power and dual output limit, 1-21
Temperature Calibration (RTD), 1-17
Square Wave Voltage Function
Synthesized Impedance assembly (A5)
—T—
Temperature Calibration (RTD) Specifications,
Time Marker function
Theory of Operation, 6-13, 6-72
Time Marker Function
TV Trigger Specifications, 6-11
—V—
AC current amplitude accuracy, 3-28
AC power amplitude accuracy (high current),
AC power amplitude accuracy (high power),
AC power amplitude accuracy (highvoltage),
AC voltage accuracy with a dc offset, 3-40
AC voltage amplitude accuracy (AUX), 3-27
AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy (NORMAL),
AC voltage amplitude accuracy, squarewaves
AC voltage amplitude accuracy, squarewaves
AC voltage harmonic amplitude accuracy
AC voltage harmonic amplitude accuracy
DC current amplitude accuracy, 3-22
DC power amplitude accuracy (AUX), 3-32
DC power amplitude accuracy (NORMAL), 3-32
DC voltage amplitude accuracy (AUX), 3-21
DC voltage amplitude accuracy (NORMAL),
DC voltage offset accuracy, 3-39
phase and frequency accuracy, 3-34
Resistance dc offset measurement, 3-24
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude, 6-96
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency, 6-97
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics, 6-98
3
5500A
Service Manual
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude, 6-40
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency, 6-41
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics, 6-42
Thermocouple measurement accuracy, 3-31
Thermocouple measuring accuracy, 3-31
Thermocouple sourcing accuracy, 3-31
Volt Function
Voltage assembly (A8)
Voltage function
Voltage Function
—W—
Wave Generator Specifications, 6-71
Wave Generator function
Wave Generator Function
—Z—
4

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement